JP7309634B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state for a player.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball) is satisfied, a specific display (suspension display or active display) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is displayed on the display means. , there are those capable of executing a look-ahead notice suggesting that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display, targeting the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-reading notice (specific light emission effect) by causing light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. can be considered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to easily recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light emitting effect.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, and capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the satisfaction of the starting condition;
with
The production executing means is
executing the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect;
It is possible to execute a special effect that notifies that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
The display means is
In the specific effect and the special effect, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner,
When moving and displaying the pseudo-movable object display in the specific effect, it is possible to hide the pseudo-movable object display after moving and displaying the pseudo-movable object display from the first display position to the second display position,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is different from the first special mode,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
The ratio of displaying the specific display of the special mode when the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher than the ratio of displaying the specific display of the first special mode when the specific light emitting effect is executed.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
When the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed
P.2 The rate of control to an advantageous state is high (for example, as shown in Fig. 10-24, when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed) high percentage of
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
moreover,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
a pseudo-moving object display performance for moving and displaying the pseudo-moving object display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect for moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable and
When the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable object display effect in a predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the movable body effect in the predetermined period, and the pseudo movable object effect is not executed in the predetermined period. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of (A) below. Conventionally, in a game machine, it is possible to execute an effect using an operable movable body as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-92949, and by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display, a structure There was a thing that made it possible to execute an effect similar to the effect of moving the movable body as. However, in such a game machine, there is a problem that the pseudo-movable body is simply moved and displayed in the same way as the movable body, and it is not possible to increase the interest of the production. There is a demand for providing a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of display.

The gaming machine described in means (A) is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo-movable object display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
a pseudo-moving object display performance for moving and displaying the pseudo-moving object display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect for moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable and
When the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable object display effect in a predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the movable body effect in the predetermined period, and the pseudo movable body effect is not executed in the predetermined period. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect.

The present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of this invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of this invention as well as a configuration other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a performance control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display start production|presentation execution processing. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the specific display start production|presentation A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a pachinko machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. It is a front view of. The timing of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart showing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. In the modified example, when a prize-winning flash effect occurs, output of a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image is a timing chart showing the timing of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of a winning flash effect, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display/active display, suggestive content of each display mode, and selection ratio when execution of winning slash effect is determined in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic portion 241SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various effects in normal reach and super reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the content and structure of various effects in a super reach. It is a figure which shows the big-hit expectation degree according to the execution status of the development production|presentation A and the development production|presentation B. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the display of the first pseudo movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the display of the second pseudo movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a movable range of the mounting movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo-movable object display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo-movable object display. (A) is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-moving object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-moving object display. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an announcement effect type determination process; (A) is a table for determination of the type of notice effect A, and (B) is a table for determination of type B of notice effect. (A) is a flowchart showing development effect A type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect A type determination table. (A) is a flow chart showing development suggestive effect type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a development suggestive effect type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing development effect B type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect B type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a decision effect type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a decision effect type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of super reach β mainly in normal reach. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing an example of effect operation in weak super reach. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of effect operation in the same weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing an example of an effect operation in strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the strong super ready-to-win effect. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation after notification of the confirmation of a big hit. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable object display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a light emission display part and mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an effect operation example of the advance notice effect B in super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an effect operation example of the advance notice effect B in super reach γ. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable object display and a mounted movable object; It is similarly an explanatory view for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the mounted movable body. It is similarly an explanatory view for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the mounted movable body. It is similarly an explanatory view for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the mounted movable body. It is similarly an explanatory view for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the mounted movable body. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo-moving object display and the second pseudo-moving object display; (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a modified example 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a modified example 2 of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a modified example 3 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) , a specific display start effect) and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, it is characterized by a portion that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0), @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. ~As shown in FIG. 10-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display start effect execution processing, and the part where the appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed ), and a periodic effect unit (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30 (D) to FIG. 10-32 (H), as shown in FIGS. 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display effect execution processing, so that the pending display and active display is displayed as a rotation animation) and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and The part where the rotation animation of these pending display and active display starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), the specific display When the start effect B is executed, the lamp 135SG009F for winning flash as a winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body from the timing before the start of display of the pending display and the active display. The part where the lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means may display the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start effect A in which a reserved display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the upper part, and a character A is displayed in the first reserved state). It can be displayed in a specific display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the suspended display and the active display appear gradually from the bottom to the top after acting on the storage display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D) , The part where the flash effect at the time of winning starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably see the specific display targeted for the specific light emission effect. recognizable.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The effect executing means once controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 10-28, FIG. 10-29 (A), FIG. 10-29(B), FIG. 10-49(A), and FIG. 10-49(B), when it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, once the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on. , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
It should be noted that the "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low luminance, but also a state in which light is not emitted.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The effect execution means once controls the display means to a low visibility state, and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image Part where the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight built into the display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is improved by a method other than lowering the brightness of the display means. Including degraded state.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is executed. is not executed (for example, FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), FIGS. 10-49 (A) to 10-68 ( As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
A variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (notice effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the variable display corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the previous notice effect, the sound corresponding to the previous notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect allows the player to execute the specific light-emitting effect. easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light effect from the sound output means before the completion of display of the specific display and the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, FIG. 10-28 , Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H) and Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined according to the start winning. If this is the case, after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display completes)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-12, execution of flash effect at the time of winning in response to start winning) is determined, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light more than the predetermined mode during the second period. It is an effect that emits light in a specific mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1, During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part that blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined manner even during the second period. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement in the game due to the hindrance of other performances caused by the light emission.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 10-28 , the execution period of the late winning flash effect is the period during which the variable display before the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect. the part containing the period and
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the target of the winning flash effect is A portion that blinks the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 when a certain variable display is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The display means displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image in the first display mode during the second period. is also displayed in a second display mode with a low degree of emphasis (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode on the display means during the first period, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light effect effect, and the image is displayed during the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, thereby hindering other displays and increasing the enjoyment of the game. You can prevent it from dropping.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, A portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect or has a higher intensity than the first output mode during the second period. Output in a second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 81 and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and at the same time, the specific light effect effect is started. During the execution of , the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. .

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-13 (2) a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emission means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69 as a modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, from the speakers 8L, 8R stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turn off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hide the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clear the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, the late winning flash effect process table is selected again, and the process timer for the late winning flash effect process timer is reset and started. Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emission effect during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69, FIG. During the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the variable display executed before the variable display, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a temporary stop is made until a display result is derived from the start of variable display, and then variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, as modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A ) ~ As shown in Fig. 10-89(n), even during the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, the win flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 and the period T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1 As shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70(A) to 10-89(n), during the temporary stop period of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash The part where the lamp 135SG009F continues blinking with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 18, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. During the previous variable display symbol fixing period, the part where the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, so that the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is the object of the specific light emission effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
The display means can variably display the first effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and variably display the second effect identification information (for example, small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information. is a game machine,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed when stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 10-33 (J)). , etc., during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. 1 The part displayed at the left end of the display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started. When the effect starts, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is flashed at the brightness of C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win. part to light up),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 10-96 (K) to 10-98 (O) , as shown in FIGS. 10-104 (K) to 10-106 (O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out)),
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when the display of the display means is switched to the specific effect start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect after entering the low-luminance state (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-90, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of super reach). ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes across a low-luminance state that accompanies the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emitting mode does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Since it can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 23 or 24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 10-90) and execution of the action effect. A motion suggesting effect (for example, a movable body motion suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-90) can be executed,
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when executing the action-suggestion effect, and after entering the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , As shown in FIG. 10-90, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and after that, the winning flash is started from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The part that lights the lamp 135SG009F for the display with the brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, light can be emitted in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-108 (A) as modification 135SG-3 , when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in FIG. 10-108(B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning The part that continues lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 26,
Light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at a first timing during variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-119 (A) and 10-119 (B) as modification 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect The timing to end the lighting mode includes the timing to start the movable object action effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the ready-to-win effect of super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on when the winning flash effect is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation for a big hit in a case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode according to the movable body action production and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to form 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 as a modification 135SG-4, according to the timing of ending the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, during the execution period of the movable body operation effect There are cases where it is during the execution period of the reach production of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
The effect execution means provides a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 10-119 as modification 135SG-4) during variable display and a second effect (for example, modification 135SG) different from the first effect. -4 as a super reach performance shown in Figure 10-119) can be executed,
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light effect can be changed to the light emission in the mode according to the first effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the action production),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner according to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect),
When changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect, and when light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect changes to light emission in a mode according to the second effect The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance and a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means controls an action effect to move the movable body (for example, a movable body action effect), an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect), and an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests that
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect as the action suggestion effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. part to change),
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. ),
A rate of controlling to an advantageous state differs between when light emission changes from a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggesting effect and when light emission changes to a mode corresponding to the specific light effect (e.g. , as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the light emission mode according to the flash performance at the time of winning, from the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance to the movable body motion suggestion performance. A part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is used and when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 30,
The display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5) and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIGS. 10-17 As shown in , when the pending display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion that is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and A portion where the suspended display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the suspended display or active display in the display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as a modification 135SG-5, FIG. 10- As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, both the winning display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. The part where the flash effect is executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by executing the specific light emission effect at a high rate. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the game and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 32 is the gaming machine according to form 31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIGS. 10-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, modification 135SG-5 As shown in , when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed. part where the ratio of change to pattern β and display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily recognized by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player's attention is focused on whether or not the specific light emission effect is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 33 is the gaming machine according to form 31 or 32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and in a second mode different from the first mode. (for example, a part that can execute the first effect effect and the second effect effect shown in the modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 , the second effect effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode (for example, in the modification 135SG-5 As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the win-time flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the execution of the specific light emission effect causes the change suggesting effect to be executed in the second mode. It is possible to increase the expectation of being executed in two modes.

The gaming machine of form 34 is the gaming machine according to form 33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ ), and a second special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modification 135SG-5, FIGS. 10-120 including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed When the display pattern is displayed in the display pattern ε, the part where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the case of the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light-emitting effect is executed at a high rate, the execution of the specific light-emitting effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying, during the specific light emission effect, a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 36 is the gaming machine according to form 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the image display device 5 has different sizes as a winning flash effect). The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The mode of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-129 (L) and FIG. 10-130 (N) etc. , a portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap differently depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 37 is the gaming machine according to form 35 or 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display as the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. , During the execution of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more unexpectedness and improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display effect, and overlapping the re-variable related display with the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect. (For example, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops, it stops in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C A part where the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlapping with the special pattern (see FIGS. 10-40 etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 35 to 38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 10-28, 10-42(a) to 10-47 ( As shown in l), the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emission means is continuously caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the predetermined end before the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed before the ready-to-win effect starts. flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not finished at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting device at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity etc. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. the part that ends the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form 41 is the gaming machine according to form 40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) , a part where the CPU 103 can transmit a design determination command that designates the stop of the variable display of the decoration design),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that terminates the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize based on the receipt of the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, when winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect) The part that can end the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash when winning due to the generation of static electricity, etc.). If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. Part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning when the start winning to the mouth occurs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific light emission effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and the remaining period of the variable display is the above-mentioned. When the predetermined condition is established when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-8, the first starting port is operated during execution of the variable display. When a start winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, even in a variable display in which the variable display result is The part that can execute reach production of super reach),
When the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display after the variable display (for example, deformation As shown in example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. If it is less than the execution period, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is lost, the part where the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is established by passing the game medium;
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starter lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the display can be displayed in any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, When the display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A part that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 47 is the gaming machine according to form 46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-9, Part where the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp is greater than the number of light emission modes of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 48 is the gaming machine according to form 46 or 47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emission effect),
In the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1, the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (In the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off after the starting winning. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display, which is the target of the starting winning flash effect, the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the starting winning flash effect. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to excessively long execution of the light emission according to the specific light emission effect by the first light emission means, and to achieve an advantageous state by the light emission mode of the specific light emission means. Players' expectations can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 46 to 48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the part where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking period of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking period of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the blinking period of the starting lamp 135SG009S is used as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect. The part that is different from the flashing cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the game interest.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100 V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. As a result, when the high probability state such as the probability variable state in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the low probability state such as the normal state or the time saving state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is increased. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A is provided. A starting port lamp 135SG009S for lighting the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) is provided in the vicinity of .

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamps 9 in the characteristic part 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. Lighting (blinking) is possible under the control of the CPU 120 .

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved storage by the number of circular reserved displays, and a circular reserved display of the number of the second special figure reserved storage. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of , and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect during execution, and the like.

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of the first special figure pending storage, and the number of the second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and the decoration patterns can be displayed in a variable manner. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

10-3, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a decorative pattern is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is the first display region 135SG005M of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this feature section 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 135SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "jackpot" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 135SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 135SG selects one of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 135SG with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. "Variable probability big hit C" to shift, and "non-variable big hit" to shift to the low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG is such that the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable-probability big win, the high-probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic portion 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is executed once, are common normal reach reach effects. is set to run. Furthermore, as the super reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed three times. A production is to be executed. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one type of reach effect is provided as the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effects of normal reach and the reach effects of super reach.

In addition, the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes higher, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of simulated continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 135SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic part 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). In addition, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern), PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. -2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1 time big hit), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times big hit), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 3 times big hit) are determined. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. there is Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times The fluctuation pattern of losing) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of losing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous performance).

That is, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 135SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is performed more frequently due to the shortening fluctuation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 135SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10 is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 135SG153, a game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The 1st special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A has a game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and although the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred, the special that has not yet started The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on establishment are reserved data. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 135SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 135SG191, a production control timer setting unit 135SG192, a production control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 135SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. A storage area, an area for storing a variable category designation command, an area for storing a pending storage number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and whether or not it is a target of a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing an area for storing a flash effect target flag at the time of winning, and a storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory in association with the number of reserved memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the contents of the reserved memory ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 10-11(C), a storage area similar to the receive command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , and an area for storing a win-time flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a win-time flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a hold The stored number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" ( step 135 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" ( step 135 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 135 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the top of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 135SGS111, the winning random number determination processing is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 135SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing portion 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as "big hit". It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at step 135 SGS 112 when winning a prize. As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot pattern is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, and specifies that it is a time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 135SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 135 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic portion 135SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and the deviation variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 judgment values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. .

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 135 SGS 134). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set a jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Go to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that becomes a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

When the received command is not the first start winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting gate winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

In step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a pattern designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), then in step 135SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command If (135SGS228; Y), if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and return to the processing of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

Incidentally, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A at the time of starting winning.

In step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 135SG194A was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D and the second reservation. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed for executing a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the suspended display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. Further, after the specific display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect execution process (step 135 SGS163) for executing a winning flash effect, and a hold display after the specific display start effect ends. and a specific display as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the active display A specific display for executing a rotation display effect (see FIGS. Rotating display effect execution processing (step 135SGS164), when it is determined to execute a pending display notice effect as a pre-reading notice in this feature part 135SG, the variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect ends. Until then, a start lamp light emission effect execution process (step 135SG165) is executed for executing the start lamp light emission effect of causing the start lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display/active display based on the hold memory. Then, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and setting the hold display as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step 161 of FIG. 10-15 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240), and determines whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135 SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the design designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the design designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is determined from the variation category command of the entry. (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (suspension display or active display is determined to be a white display pattern α), and at a rate of 5%, the suspension display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β (the display mode of suspension display or active display is blue), and 0% is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the display pattern α ), and decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute with γ (display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of suspension display or active display is white) at a rate of 65%. 25% of the time, it is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and 10% of the time, the pending display forewarning effect is executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or the active display in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 15% to not execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. red).

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has a high probability of winning a big hit (the degree of expectation for a big hit), and the pending display or the active display is displayed in white. It is set so that the ratio of the target variable display result to be lost is highest when the target is the highest (expectation for the big hit according to the display color of the pending display and active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 10-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern ( Step 135 (SGS247), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y) , when it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect (step 135SGS248), End the pre-reading notice setting process.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as a pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 10-15 as the specific display start effect execution process. In the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251). Whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on whether the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later, is in operation. It should be judged by whether.

When the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135 SGS251; N), whether or not the start winning designation command is received (whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag is set) is determined (step 135SGS252). If no starting winning designation command is received (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display start effect execution processing is terminated. In addition, if there is a reception of the start winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning win command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), specify It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the processing of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, if the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the suspension display notice effect (step 135 SGS254; N), the display position of the specified display (suspension display or active display) is displayed. The corresponding process table for specific display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set process table for specific display start effect (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start effect execution processing. .

Further, when the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (the process for the specific display start effect A). The value of the timer or the process timer for specific display start effect B) is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS260), and the process timer for specific display start effect (the process timer for specific display start effect being executed) that is decremented by 1 times out. (Step 135SGS261). If the process timer for specific display start effect being executed has not timed out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect being executed (step 135SGS262), the specific display start effect execution process is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for specific display start effect being executed times out (step 135 SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for specific display start effect is the final process timer for specific display start effect. (step 135 SGS263). When the final specific display start effect process timer times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is ended (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution processing is ended. If the final specific display start effect process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the next specific display start effect process timer is started, and the next specific display start effect is executed. The effect device is controlled (steps 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, and step 135SGS266) in accordance with the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer, and the specific display start effect execution processing ends.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a starting prize occurs and it is determined based on the starting prize not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect), or when the starting prize is the second If it is a starting prize to the starting port, as shown in FIGS. , in the active display area 135SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, an appearance animation in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as the specific display start effect A. .

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display start effect A is approximately 0.2 seconds. Then, the suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display start effect A is, as the specific display rotation display effect described above, similar to the other suspended displays and active displays, in the active display area 135SG005A or the suspended storage display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U. Transition to rotation animation display.

In addition, when a starting prize is generated, execution of a pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first starting port, As shown in FIGS. 10-20(A) to 10-20(C) and FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4), as the specific display start effect B, first, an image An animation in which the character A appears from the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is displayed on the display device 5 . After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, if the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure reservation memory already exists, the character A is the first An animation that moves to the 1 reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold display is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the suspension display is displayed in the first suspension storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display start effect B is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the pending display appearance animation is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when executing the specific display start effect B targeting the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the holding display based on the starting winning. . After the end of the specific display start effect B, the reserved display shifts to a rotating animation display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect, like the other reserved displays and active displays.

It should be noted that when the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist , an animation in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display of the character A is displayed on the basis of the start winning, as in FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4). An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed on the position where the target is, that is, the active display area 135SG005A. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, and the end of the animation. to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotating display effect.

FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22 are flow charts showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 10-21 as the winning flash effect execution processing. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays these in the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display announcement effect is being executed (step 135 SGS273).

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). If the game state is a normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), further whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state (Step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is a reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135 SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135 SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the ready-to-win effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the win-time flash effect based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, when the variable display result is a failure, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

In other words, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). If it is decided to execute flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the object of flash effect at the time of winning is set to the flag for flash effect at the time of winning of the entry (entry for which the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning is not set). (step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are set to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds after the occurrence of the start winning. Flashing in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) and 10-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high luminance C1 and extinguishing are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this characteristic part 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the first term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term winning. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the sound corresponding to the flash effect. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second), such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be output repeatedly. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 135SG, in addition to the above-described sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are different using different channels. Simultaneous output from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0-3 If neither (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), no winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b), the winning flash effect target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the winning flash effect is not the target (step 135SG279c), and the winning flash effect execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271). 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and the previous term after decrementing the value by 1. It is determined whether or not the process timer for winning flash effects has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 operates the effect device in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning being executed. control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the final process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last term has not timed out (step 135 SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of the process data, and starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next previous term winning. , the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of the next winning (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

At step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. As a mode corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash effect. The lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term to the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect of the target variable display super reach. Flashing is performed in a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and the silhouette image of the character A imitated by the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning in the image display device 5. This is an effect for displaying 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit white or red light in the same manner as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. Since the late winning flash effect is performed at a lower luminance than the early winning flash effect (see FIG. 10-28), the actual lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect is It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

As shown in FIG. 10-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (especially the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period other than during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. It is designed to repeat lighting and (blinking) extinguishing with . In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, and during the blinking, it is shown in FIGS. Thus, the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color step by step in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

In step 135SGS284, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the early winning is not in operation, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 Decrease the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and judge whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning which has decreased the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning being executed (step 135 SGS300). ), go to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the final process timer for flash effects at the time of the latter period has not timed out (step 135 SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the flash effects at the time of the latter period is started, and the process data 1 Control the rendering device according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and proceed to step 135SGS307.

Further, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the first process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B, that is, the variable display during execution. It is determined whether or not is a variable display for flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

When it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, turns off the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and Terminate the flash effect execution process.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the symbol confirmation command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended, the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash effect execution processing at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the flash effect execution process at the time of winning is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the present characteristic section 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is the effect It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period passes until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the target variable display.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the later timing, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Incidentally, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 10-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. is selected, and one process table for effect is selected as the process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. In other words, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc., the effect pattern (effect period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term of this characteristic part 135SG is always the same effect mode and the same effect period at the time of winning the first term regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period are executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a manner corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). While the effect is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), blinking control in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the game effect The flashing control of the lamp 9 is performed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the previous term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the advance notice effect execution processing, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting processing, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed during execution of the variable display, and in which effect pattern the notice effect is executed. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the advance notice effect according to the result of the determination. Further, when the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process described above, one effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The effect executed as the forewarning effect in the characterizing portion 135SG is a dialogue foretelling effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed lines.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after step 135SGS366 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination command has been received is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for a special symbol. (Step S173) is updated to a value according to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the variable display. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decorative design effect control based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device at the time of execution of flash effect at the time of winning in this characterizing section 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-28 to 10-68. First, FIG. 10-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning. In addition, FIG. 10-28 shows both the case where execution of the holding display notice effect is decided when the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the holding display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. Figures 10-29 to 10-48 show the image display device 5 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 10-49 to 10-68 show that a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, execution of the winning flash effect is determined, while non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode in the image display device 5 and the winning-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the case of winning.

10-29 to 10-48 "When execution of pending display notice effect and winning flash effect is determined", the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is the display pattern β or This is the case where it is displayed in the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red round shape), and the "while the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided, the pending display notice" shown in FIGS. "When it is decided not to execute the effect" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to the advance notice production, such as the sound of a character speaking characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-28 and FIG. 10-29(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-30(C), and 10-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (Fig. 10-32 (G) and Fig. 10- 32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-32 (G), and 10-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-32(H), 10-33(I), and 10-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red as described above, even if the degree of expectation for a big hit is changed according to the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(H) and 10-33(J), in the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J), 10-34 (K) and 10-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative design and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(K) to 10-41(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, The output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (S) to 10-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-40 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns indicating normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter stage, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), when the variable display that is out of normal reach is completed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the image display device 5 displays a decorative pattern and a small display. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-40(W) and 10-40(X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-42(a) and 10-42(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43(c) to 10-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-43(d) and 10-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-45(g) to 10-46(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-46 (j)), the flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed as the late winning flash effect. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10-45(g) and 10-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative pattern. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-48 (m) and 10-48 (n), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 ends. . These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a mode corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d respond to the ready-to-win effect. The light emission mode (lighting at luminance C1) is started.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and no sound is produced. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emitting effect is used. From the timing of the starting prize, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the start lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the start winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, As shown in 10-28 and FIG. 10-49(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-50(C), and 10-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. Appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning (previous flash effect at the time of winning) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Fig. 10-19 (B-1) to Fig. 10-19 ( B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display start effect A is executed together with the win-time flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the above-described specific display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIGS. 10-29 to 10-29). 10-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display start effect B is executed, and the rotation animation is started.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in the characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-52 (G) and 10-52 (H), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. Return to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-52(H), 10-53(I), and 10-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-52(H) and 10-53(J), in this characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-53 (J), 10-54 (K) and 10-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-53(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-54(K) to 10-61(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-58 (S) to 10-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-60 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns indicating normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-60 (W) and 10-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-62(a) and 10-62(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-63(c) to 10-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-63(d) and 10-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-65(g) to 10-66(j). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 10-65(g) and 10-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative design, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative design. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, and green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the lighting mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-66 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R emit light. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-68 (m) and 10-68 (n), when it comes to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0 ends. . The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. .

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and no sound is produced. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. 10-28, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect. . Further, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash presentation, and has a brightness of C2 and a cycle during the execution period of the latter winning flash presentation. While flashing at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning, and at the time of the second prize winning. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, not only the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c. The movable body lamp 9d also blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed are targeted for the pending memory based on the start winning. is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect for the reserved storage based on. Specifically, when a new start prize is generated during the variable display, a display pattern α to a display pattern γ (of a pending display notice effect) is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A as a specific display start effect A or a specific display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution or the display pattern in the case of execution of the pending display notice effect), the active display is rotated and displayed as a specific display rotating display effect. is executed, and the winning flash effects (previous winning flash effects and late winning flash effects) are executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(B) to 10-50(D), the specific display start effect is suspended. 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), 10-49(B) to 10- As shown in 50 (D), it is displayed as a pending display and a rotation animation, and as shown in FIGS. Since the spinning animation of the hold display is started, the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), when the specific display start effect B is executed, from the timing before the start of display of the pending display, flash effect at the time of winning Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light, the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), even when the specific display start effect A is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the timing before the start of display of the pending display. Winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light, so that winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in -50 (D), the win-time flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display start effect A, so the display pattern of the pending display is any one of the display patterns α to γ. Also, since the winning flash performance can be started before the specific display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display targeted for the winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A), Figure 10-29 (B), Figure 10-49 (A), and Figure 10-49 (B), when winning based on the start winning When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player turns off the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once to turn off the winning flash effect. recognizable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when execution of the winning flash effect is determined based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are once turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame When the lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, the luminance is C3 which is lower than the luminance C2). You can change it. In other words, the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are emitting light at low brightness, and in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which light is not emitted).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n) and FIGS. 10-49(A) to 10-68(n), the notice effect is being executed during the variable display. Winning flash effects can be executed depending on whether or not they are being executed, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effects during execution of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, The sound corresponding to the advance notice performance is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting the corresponding sound, the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is the sound corresponding to the announcement effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a volume lower than V2. (For example, volume V3) may be output.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is started during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Output of the sound corresponding to the hour flash effect may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice effect may be output, or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the change display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A) ~ Figure 10-32 (H), Figure 10-49 (A) ~ Figure 10-50 (D), at the time of winning according to the start winning When the execution of the flash effect is determined, after the winning flash effect corresponding sound is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is decided, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, after the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display animation are started. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the flash at the time of winning is flashed. By blinking the winning lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C1 so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for flashing at the time of winning from flickering at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flashing at the time of winning at the later stage, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, in this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes as the latter winning flash effect. is blinked at a luminance C2 that is lower than the luminance C1 and a period T2 that is longer than the period T1 as a "specific form with a low degree of emphasis". In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG is a low-speed flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to the slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle). and a low luminance mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the low luminance. Only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode may be used as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period during which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period during which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 throughout the start of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the target It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the first prize, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the second prize. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the late prize winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, thereby hindering other displays and enhancing the enjoyment of the game. decrease can be suppressed.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Then, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, the player can easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the mode for suppressing the decline in game interest has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, other effects at the time of winning It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning starts. During the symbol determination period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking, that is, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination command (the determination command reception flag is set) or not, or variable Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled to the jackpot game state by continuously executing the blinking of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F even during the pattern fixing period. can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in accordance with the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term (brightness C1 and cycle T1), and after the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is turned on as the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term according to the flash effect at the time of winning (luminance C2 and cycle T2). ), while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and period T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention is exemplified. is not limited to this, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the previous term is completed, so that during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern fixing period, the small pattern 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a failure. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the pattern fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M makes it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during the variable display, and variable display during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the special pattern (see FIGS. 10-40 etc.) that stops in the “middle” decorative pattern display area 5C is a silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner, the special pattern is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the interest of the variable display, which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. At the start timing, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. is ended, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 confirms the pattern. Since the flash effect at the time of winning is ended based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of ending the emission of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not decided, so the ready-to-win effect of super ready to reach. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display or the active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different degrees of expectation for big hits. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or the active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the lighting mode of the lamp 9 or the like, the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the start winning to the end of the variable display based on the start winning. can also be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the characterizing part 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period (while the variable display is stopped) or not, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 to 10-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be performed during the design determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-69 and FIG. 10-70(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-71(C), and 10-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after the character A has moved to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the fourth An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display of the pending display of is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in this modification 135SG-1, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, from the completion of display of the pending display based on the starting win. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (Fig. 10-73 (G) and Fig. 10-73(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-73 (G) and 10-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamp 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals starts to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-74(I) and 10-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-74 (J), 10-75 (K) and 10-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-76 (M) and 10-76 (N), during the symbol fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the second stage The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are movable. Only the blinking of the body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 continues.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-75(K) to 10-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, While the output of the winning flash effect sound from 8R at volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the design fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the late winning time is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image is displayed. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is never executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-79 (S) to 10-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Fig. 10-81 ( W) In this variation 135SG-1, the decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and the special design that notifies the temporary stop in the middle decorative design display area 5C. is temporarily stopped), as a flash effect for the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and an image is displayed. Display of silhouette image 135SG005S on device 5 is executed.

In FIG. 10-81(W), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, even during the temporary stop of the decoration pattern, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking is executed. In other words, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), when the variable display that is out of normal reach is completed in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, the image display device 5 displays the decoration pattern and the small display. The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapping manner even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-81 (W) and 10-81 (X), while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-83(a) and 10-83(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-84(c) to 10-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-84(d) and 10-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-86(g) to 10-87(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-87 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R emit light. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-89 (m) and 10-89 (n), when it is time to start the reach effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continuously executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-69, when a starting prize is generated during execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the starting prize, the start lamp light emission effect is used. From the timing of the starting prize, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the start lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

As described above, in this modification 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is being executed by continuously turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect during the pattern fixing period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the variable display decorative pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is provided. By continuing the blinking of the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the flash effect at the time of winning of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette Although the form of stopping the display of the image 135SG005S is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect for the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, any one of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S Or you may make it perform only two.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output as the flash effect for the late winning, the light emission of the flash lamp for winning the prize 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the image 135SG005S is not displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as the late winning flash effect is executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. As a form of not executing the output of the sound corresponding to the effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation command during execution of the late winning flash effect. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning, during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning is output, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is emitted, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120 selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning, based on the reception of the first variable display start command. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started in response to the start of the new variable display.

In addition, as a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform the late winning flash effect. Based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command during execution of the effect, the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning is not sent to the lamp control board 14, but the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. Lighting control data for maintaining light-off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating light-off as RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until a variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette image will be performed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see FIG. 10-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, when the variable display ends during the execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the flash effect for the late winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. While stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d However, the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also stop. In particular, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d stop blinking during the design confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the design fixing period. The color corresponding to the image) may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as an explanation of FIG. 10-8, it was described that a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach. is provided, the hit expectations are different between the reach productions of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach production of super reach, the reach production of super reach α and the reach production of the super reach α). A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

Especially in this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of super reach performances with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a production position (for example, a central front position in the front view of the image display device 5), and flash production at the time of winning. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (variable display for executing a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the rendering position) during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the first display area 135SG005F is once whited out, the movable body 32 Executes a movable body action suggestive effect that suggests moving to the effect position, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β (Super Reach β reach effect is executed variable display), the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out. A movable body motion presentation may be executed to move from the position to the presentation position.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the action of the movable body 32 during the whiteout period, and when the movable body 32 moves to the presentation position (when the movable body action presentation is executed). can inform the player that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the movable body operation performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-91(B), 10-92(C), and 10-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-93(E) to 10-94(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-94 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-95 (I) to 10-96 (L), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90 (A) and FIGS. 10-96 (K) to 10-97 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). ends, the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the movement of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90(A), 10-98(O) and 10-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggesting effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts superimposing Along with the start of the ready-to-win effect of reach α, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts with the brightness C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started.

In addition, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of super reach β, as shown in FIGS. 10-99 (A) and 10-99 (B), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-99(B), 10-100(C), and 10-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-101(E) to 10-102(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-102 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-103 (I) to 10-104 (L), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B) and FIGS. 10-104 (K) to 10-105 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the movement of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

After the movable body action suggestive presentation ends, the whiteout period ends and the movable body action presentation is completed, as shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B) and FIGS. , the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position by a drive mechanism (not shown). It should be noted that during the period of the movable body motion presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set at the brightness C1 according to the movable body motion presentation. Light. Although not shown in FIG. 10-90(B), the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable object motion presentation at volume V1 (see FIG. 10-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B), 10-107 (Q) and 10-107 (R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and the white-out are completed, the super reach in the image display device 5 At the same time that the ready-to-win effect of β is started, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with the luminance C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach [beta]. In addition, as the ready-to-reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect of super reach β, a variable display corresponding sound and the reach of super reach α can be used so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect of super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like that is different from the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the effect may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win, which is the object of the flash effect for winning, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win. , and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with the brightness C2. Since light is emitted (lighting with luminance C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking at the cycle T2, the game interest of the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-96(K) to 10-98(O) and FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out). In addition, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach performance of the super reach. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed. Then, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of the movable body action effect (moving the movable body 32 to the effect position). It lights up with the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at the brightness C1 after turning off due to the execution of the movable body motion suggesting effect, so that the change in the light emission mode does not give the player a sense of incongruity. Since this can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, a form in which the dialogue announcement effect can be executed as an announcement effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 135SG-3, as the notice effect, in addition to the dialogue notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes step by step, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change steps. A step-up effect with different degrees, a group announcement effect in which a group of characters crosses the image display device 5, or the like may be executed.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image step by step is used for the winning flash. By temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2, the effect of the step-up effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-108(B), 10-114(A) to 10-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the win-time flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already flashed with the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, during the execution of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash performance, is turned on according to the step-up performance. You may make it not emit light in the mode.

As described above, in the modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the flash effect for winning, that is, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F has the brightness C2 as the flash effect for winning. In addition, when the step-up effect of turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started in the state of blinking at the cycle T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F from starting lighting in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the win-time flash effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2, the movable body motion rendering can be executed to move the movable body 32 from the retracted position (for example, the upper position of the image display device 5) to the effect position (for example, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, the player may be notified that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which of the light emission modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, 70% of the movable body It is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion representation of the movable body from the start timing of the action presentation, and the ready-to-win presentation is started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a failure, at the start of the variable display, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect, and at a rate of 70%, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. is changed from a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, if it is decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the decision is made. and control the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the execution period of the movable body motion effect is Since it may be during the execution period of ready-to-win performance, the game determines whether the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning is during the execution period of moving body action performance or during the execution period of super-ready-to-win performance. easy for people to recognize. In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect according to the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big win is different between the case of using the light emission mode and the case of using the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the amusement interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (the light emitting mode changes to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect) timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the timing when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends, the pachinko game The setting value set in the machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body motion effect during the variable display that is the object of the win-time flash effect or at the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The mode can be changed, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big win differs between the start timing of the ready-to-win performance and the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance, the player pays attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F changes at the time of winning. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, in the super reach variable display, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion rendering, a movable body motion suggesting rendering that suggests the execution of the movable body motion rendering may be executed. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion suggesting motion of the movable body, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash motion motion suggesting motion of the winning prize. The degree of expectation for a big win may be different between the case of setting the light emission mode according to the movable body operation suggesting performance from the start timing and the case of setting the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. A mode is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of the mode and the case of the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is won. The light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F is terminated at the start timing of the movable body operation suggesting presentation and at the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation, and at which timing the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of prize winning is provided. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on whether the game ends with . In this way, even if a plurality of timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings It suffices to end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be completed at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the winning flash effect can be performed. At the end timing of the target variable display, the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific display (holding display and active display), the display pattern α having the lowest big-hit expectation is a white circle, and the big-hit expectation is higher than the display pattern α and is blue. and a red circular display pattern γ with a higher expectation of a big hit than the display pattern β, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display pattern α to display pattern γ, either display as pending display or active display (Expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low) Display pattern δ, which is a circle with white flashes, may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of , as a pending display or active display is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during the display of a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display pattern α to the display pattern γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation for a big hit, and the display pattern α (white display ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, with respect to the degree of expectation for the big win of the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation for the big win may be set lower than the display pattern α, or may be set lower than the display pattern α. The degree of expectation for a big hit may also be set to be high and lower than that of the display pattern β.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε that can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ are provided as the pending display and the active display pattern, but the present invention is limited to this. The display pattern α may be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, the characterizing section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display notice effect (a display pattern β or a display pattern β for displaying a pending display or an active display) and the display pattern, and determines whether to execute a winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the time of starting winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ is determined at the lowest rate, and the display pattern α is determined at the lowest rate. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes of specific displays (suspended display and active display), and when specific displays are displayed in display pattern δ and display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the ratio of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case of display in the pattern β or the display pattern γ, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning can draw the player's attention to the specific display and the specific display. Since the player can also be made to pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns in which the specific display is displayed in a circle that blinks in white, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and blinking mode.

In this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, flash effects are displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-5, as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color (for example, purple, black, etc.) other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode and special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is exemplified to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute an action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of action effects, a plurality of effects modes ( For example, a first action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and the first effect effect have different effects. A second effect effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is provided. When the second effect performance is executed, the win-time flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the effect effect is executed by the first effect effect or the second effect effect, and by executing the win-time flash effect, the effect effect is changed to the second effect effect. It is possible to heighten expectations for execution in action presentation.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the ratio of execution of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ will cause the player to be dissuaded. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. , the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may act on other characters, and as a result of the action, the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-121 (A) and 10-121 (B), when the number of the first special figure pending memory is 3 and the variable display is in progress, the first start opening wins When (start winning) occurs and the display pattern of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win, the fourth display pattern ε of the first hold memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. , and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character (see FIG. 10-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(A) and 10-122(B), the When the friendly character (suspended display of the display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth reserved display to the display position of the third reserved display, the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. act (shoot) against

Then, every time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(C) and 10-122(D), the When the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed in the active state. It moves to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-123(G) and 10-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the friendly character is displayed in the display pattern β or It changes to the active display of the display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-123(I) and 10-123(J), when the friendly character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the display pattern of the enemy character or the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Change to the active display of α.

In this modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friend character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby causing the active display to be displayed. Although the display pattern β and display pattern γ can be changed to the active display of the friendly character, the present invention is not limited to this. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold display area 135SG005D, the friend character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the winning flash effect is executed than in the case where the winning flash effect is not executed. may be changed to the suspended display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to execute the winning flash effect during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the player is present, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display, the display pattern .delta. is added, but when the pending display and the active display are displayed in these display patterns δ and ε, it is the same as when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display patterns α to γ. Then, the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ, the specific display start effect A (see FIG. 10-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the pending display or the active display is displayed. When the display pattern ε is displayed, the specific display start effect B (see FIG. 10-20) or the period during which the display of the pending display or the active display is completed is the same as in the case of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. A specific display start effect longer than the effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, similar to the characteristic portion 135SG, the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed. , the winning flash effect sound and the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are recognized by the player.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, as the prize-winning flash effect, a form of displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 together with blinking of the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-124 (A) and 10-124 (B), winning a prize to the first start port ( When a start winning) occurs, and execution of the pending display notice effect and execution of the win flash effect are determined based on the start win, as shown in FIG. The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-124 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-125(C) and 10-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash Flashing control of the control lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the period T1 is started. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this characteristic part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the display position) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acted position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D has been completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect for the late winning, as shown in FIGS. 10-127 (G) and 10-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at the volume V2. , Blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1), game effect lamp 9 except stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y with brightness C2 and blinking with cycle T2 (Fig. 10- 27(A) to FIG. 10-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. be.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-128(I) and 10-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-128 (J), 10-129 (K) and 10-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second variant 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-128(J), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-129(K) and 10-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 10-130 (M) and 10-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the combination of the decorative design and the small design 135SG005M in the image display device 5 indicates a failure. Derived display is performed (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash effect at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this modified example 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a silhouette of a large size can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed in an overlapping manner. and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette images 135SG005S and the silhouette images 135SG005S are active according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed. Since the overlap mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and where they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but if the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 is provided. Before the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it overlaps with the pending display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the active display area 135SG005A during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by further imparting unexpectedness to the game.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the suspension display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning is illustrated in a form in which it can be displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. It is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning as illustrated in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the "intermediate ” (see FIGS. 10-40, etc.) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be overlapped and displayed. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for informing the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect in the present invention, a mode in which the special symbol stops in the "medium" decoration symbol display area 5C was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as a re-variable display effect, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the special symbol, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect may be displayed overlapping the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash presentation at the time of winning, the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term or less, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term) is executed, whereby the flash at the time of winning is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (suspended display or active display) of the object of rendering from becoming difficult to understand.

In this variation 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is exemplified based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the preceding winning flash effect. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the winning flash effect depends on a period other than the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a reference.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the first prize flash effect. In this case, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss, the win-time flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize from being lowered due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, blinking with brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the previous winning flash effect) and brightness C2 and cycle T2. blinking (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize later) and two light emission modes are provided. On the other hand, as the light emission mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp, blue light emission with a luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with a luminance C2 according to the display pattern γ are combined. is provided. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of lighting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect The number of modes may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as display patterns for the pending display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the lighting mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the lighting performance of the starting lamp. and the display pattern ε, even if the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the win flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the win flash effect, and the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light in the start lamp light emitting effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect may be provided larger than the light emitting area in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set when the starting winning occurs. After that, it emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, while the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the start winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be performed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emitting mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the form in which the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking as the starter lamp light emission effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starter lamp is started as the starter lamp light emission effect. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is flashed as the starter lamp light emission effect in this way, the flashing cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is regarded as the flashing cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. can be different. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this way, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the characterizing part 135SG has a configuration in which the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, etc. are turned off once when the winning flash effect is executed. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-11, in the case of executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5 is temporarily changed. may be reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the winning flash effect may be started. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the form in which the brightness of the device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to the low visibility state in which the visibility is lower than that of the previous state has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to reducing the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in vertical directions, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display on the image display device 5. It may be one that lowers the visibility of the image that is displayed.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means that if the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced by a method other than the brightness reduction. Includes images that reduce the visibility of the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when the execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning, the output of the winning flash effect corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Although the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the win-win flash lamp 135SG009F is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution is decided, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect and the animation of the pending display and the active display will be completed. may By doing so, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred by flashing (emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided. It can improve amusement interest.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the win-win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hold display and An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the characterizing section 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, and for the flash effect at the time of winning. Flashing of the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C1 and the period T1, display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R Although the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are temporarily executed. You may By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V1 as in the case of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, and is for the flash at the time of winning. When the lamp 135SG009F flashes with the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second term, when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts, the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, The speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, blinks the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 temporarily. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Only one or only two of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are executed. You may do so.

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), and the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed based on the start winning. It is executable, and the change in the lighting mode as the winning flash effect differs according to the lamp (characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-68), and the winning flash effect during the fixed period of the variable display pattern (Modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 to 10-89), capable of executing reach effects of super reach with different expectations of big hits, and moving the movable body before the reach effects with high expectations of big hits. An effect can be executed, and when the movable body action effect is to be executed, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. One (Modification 2, FIGS. 10-90 to 10-107), step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and when step-up effect is executed when winning flash effect is not executed, winning flash effect While the lighting lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance, when the step-up performance is executed during execution of the winning flash performance, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash performance. (Modification 135SG-3, FIGS. 10-108 to 10-118) that does not change from the light emission mode according to the response, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the lamp for the flash at the time of winning When the light emission mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect according to the ready-to-win effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether it changes to the light emitting mode (variant 135SG-4, FIGS. 10-119), and the display pattern α to the display pattern ε are provided as the display mode of the pending display and the active display. Depending on whether the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined by winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 10- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the pending display, the display pattern ε is changed to any one of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (variation 135SG- 6, FIGS. 10-121 to 10-123), the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning (modification 135SG-7, FIG. 10-124 to FIGS. 10-130), etc., but as a pachinko game machine of the present invention, it is possible to combine two or more characteristic portions or modifications from these plural characteristic portions or modifications. good.

Further, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if changes and additions are made within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. hand,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink with the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, and the flash effect at the time of the second prize is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
moreover,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
a pseudo-moving object display performance for moving and displaying the pseudo-moving object display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect for moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable and
When the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable object display effect in a predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the movable body effect in the predetermined period, and the pseudo movable body effect is not executed in the predetermined period. A gaming machine is exemplified in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the completion of display of the specific display, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed.

In other words, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means, and the player can easily recognize the specific display as the target of the specific light emitting effect. Since the player pays attention to the performance in anticipation of execution of the movable body performance, the attraction of the performance can be improved. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which makes the presentation easy for the player to understand when installed in the game hall, and which makes the presentation more interesting.

Further, the light emitting effect may be executed in conjunction with the execution of the pseudo movable object effect. By doing so, a more suitable presentation can be executed, and the interest is improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of drawing the player's attention to the execution of the pseudo-movable body display effect, the gaming machine is controllable to an advantageous state for the player,
display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo-movable object display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
a pseudo-moving object display performance for moving and displaying the pseudo-moving object display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect for moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable and
When the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable object display effect in a predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the movable body effect in the predetermined period, and the pseudo movable object effect is not executed in the predetermined period. A gaming machine is exemplified in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Other form examples)

A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 241SG form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the first pseudo-moving body display a portion where Z100 can be moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position;
a movable body that can move from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounting movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the rendering position);
with
The direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are common directions ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are common downward direction),
Movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, first pseudo The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. (See FIG. 14-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by performing an effect with a faster impact than the movement of the movable body by the pseudo-movable body display.

The game machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Display means capable of displaying a pseudo-moving body display (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 on the image display device 5),
The pseudo-movable object display performs a reaction movement of a predetermined movement amount when moved from a first position (eg, first origin position) to a second position (eg, first effect position) different from the first position. It is a display imitating the movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be performed,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable object display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image The display device 5 can move and display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. some part),
The pseudo-moving body display performs a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement when the movement is displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and is stopped and displayed at the first effect display position;
The specific amount of movement is greater than the predetermined amount of movement (for example, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed when it moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. The moving amount L12 of the reaction motion display is larger than the moving amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounting movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position. Figure 14-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display makes it possible to pseudo-realize a performance similar to that of the movable object without mounting the movable object, and at the same time, the reaction occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the action in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a strong impression on the player.

The game machine of form 3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the first pseudo-moving body display A portion where Z100 can be moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
a movable body that can move from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounting movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the rendering position);
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
A pseudo-moving body display effect for moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the second display position). 1 part that can be moved and displayed to the effect display position),
a movable body effect for moving the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can move the mounting movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position);
is executable and
When the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable object display effect in a predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the movable body effect in the predetermined period, and the pseudo movable body effect is not executed in the predetermined period. The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed (for example, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development using the mounted movable body 32 When the performance A and the development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the game is controlled to a big win game state more than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed. percentage (jackpot expectation) is high. See Figure 14-11),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect.

The game machine of form 4 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the second pseudo-moving body display a portion where Z200 can be moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position;
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) of the variable display result to be a big hit) that suggests that the pseudo movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state, and
A notification effect (for example, a development effect B that notifies that the game will develop into a strong super reach effect) for informing the player of advantageous contents;
A predetermined effect (e.g., development effect B Development suggestion production that suggests the possibility of being executed) and
is executable and
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable object display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) with different expectations for execution of the notification effect,
The display means is
In the special suggestive effect, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, moving and displaying from the second display position to the first display position, and then hiding ( 14-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined effect, after displaying the pseudo movable body display at the second display position, it is hidden without moving from the second display position to the first display position (FIG. 14-26 (A ) to (J), see FIG. 14-27 (A)),
Before executing the notification effect and when hiding the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position, the notification related image (for example, Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 14-26 (F) to (J) and FIG. 14-27 (A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special suggestive effect, the pseudo-movable object display is displayed moving in the same way as the movable object as a structure, so attention is paid to whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display in the same manner as the movable body, and the display position is not returned from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is hidden, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion to execute the notification effect.

The game machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first initial display a portion that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, and a portion that can be moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position); ,
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
A special effect (for example, a decision effect to notify whether or not to be controlled to a big hit game state) that informs that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
A specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed (for example, a development effect B that informs that the effect will be executed after developing into a strong super reach effect);
is executable and
The display means is
In the specific effect and the special effect, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner,
When moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display in the specific effect, after moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display is moved from the second display position to the first display. It is hidden without being moved to a position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special effect (for example, the state at the start of display of the ready-to-win title image Z51) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. possible (see FIGS. 14-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display in the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then from the second display position to the first display. Move it to a position and then hide it (see FIGS. 14-30 (A) to (F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the display of the suggestive image is prioritized from the second display position to the second display position rather than the display of the pseudo movable object moving in the same manner as the movable object as a structure. Since it is not displayed without returning to the first display position, the player can be made to pay attention to the suggestion of execution of the special effect, and in the special effect, the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the same way as the movable object. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the notification of advantageous contents without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The game machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first initial display A portion that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position),
The display means is
moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position);
Movement display of the pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (FIG. 14-40 (A) to (C)),
A specific image that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo-moving object display in the display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position (for example, an image showing a plurality of broken glass pieces due to cracked glass) Effect image Z71) in which Z71A scatters can be displayed (see FIGS. 14-31),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving quickly without lowering the visibility, and the moving display can be favorably impressed on the player by emphasizing the moving display with the specific image. can.

The game machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying a pseudo-moving body display including a first pseudo-moving body display and a second pseudo-moving body display different from the first pseudo-moving body display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-moving body The display Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the image display device 5 can move the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. movable displayable part),
The first pseudo movable object display can be displayed by moving from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 14-16 (B)),
The second pseudo movable object display can be displayed by moving from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 14-16(C)),
The display means is
Moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, the first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 14-40 (A) to (C) ),
The moving display of the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame. (See FIGS. 14-40 (A) to (C)),
Movement display of the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and movement display of the second pseudo movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. (For example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200. to the first specific effect display position (see Figure 14-40),
When the first pseudo-movable object display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo-movable object display moves from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on when it is displayed (for example, in the announcement effect B, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position When PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4, which is displayed by moving from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) is different when the pattern PBY-1 moved and displayed to the display position and the pattern PBY-2 moved and displayed to the second specific effect display position are executed. 14-10 and 14-20 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo-moving object display and the second pseudo-moving object display is moved and displayed. A player can be made to recognize the display of the movable object and the display of the second pseudo-movable object by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
A movable body (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100) movable from a first position (e.g., first origin position) to a second position (e.g., first rendering position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a reaction movement of a certain movement amount is performed (see FIG. 14-36),
When the pseudo movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 14-36),
The specific amount of movement is greater than the certain amount of movement (for example, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first The moving amount L12 of the reaction motion display is larger than the moving amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounting movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position. Figure 14-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display makes it possible to pseudo-realize the same performance as that of the movable object without mounting the movable object, and at the same time, the reaction occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the action in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a strong impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A movable body (e.g., mounting movable body 32) movable from a first position (e.g., origin position) to a second position (e.g., production position) different from the first position,
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (for example, movement display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (for example, movement distance L1) (Fig. 14-16),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the pseudo-moving object display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the moving object, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
The pseudo movable body display includes a performance display section (for example, performance display sections Z100A and Z200A) and a mechanism display section (for example, mechanism display sections Z100B and Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position before the effect display unit (see FIGS. 14-36 (B1) and (B2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 10,
Movement display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo movable body display is faster than movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, first pseudo movable body display) The amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIG. 14-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
The movement period between the first position and the second position of the movable body includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (Fig. 14-39 (A )reference),
the movement display period of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 14-39(B));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (for example, light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of luminous display of the luminous display section when the quasi-movable body display is moved to the second display position (the effect control CPU 120 changes the first quasi-movable body display Z100 to the first display position). After moving and displaying to the effect position, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle (see Fig. 14-31 (D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo-movable object display moved and displayed at the second display position.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (for example, light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not emit light to display the light-emitting display unit when moving and displaying the pseudo-movable object display (see FIG. 14-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo-moving object display inconspicuous during the moving display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
The movable body includes a light-emitting portion capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display portions Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed at the second display position, the display means performs light emission display of the light emission display section in a manner common to light emission of the light emission section (effect control CPU 120, After moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first rendering position, the portion where the mounted movable body LED208 and the light emitting display section Z108A perform light emission display at substantially the same cycle (see Fig. 14-31(D)) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 17,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the second pseudo movable body display. A portion where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
a direction in which the pseudo-moving object display moves from the first display position to the second display position; a direction in which the pseudo-moving object display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position; are different directions (for example, the downward direction in which the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the notice effect A, and the notice effect B is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position (see FIGS. 14-33),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, one pseudo-movable object display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to achieve with a movable object.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The display means moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a different direction. can be moved and displayed (see Fig. 14-43),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 11(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the variable special figure is set to 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11 (B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 11 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the setting value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 13, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S90175 described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the mounting movable body 32, outputting a sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal) Various effect control during the variable display of the decoration pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, is executed by the output of . After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state has been received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characterizing portion 241SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 14-1 to 14-40. It should be noted that, in the following description, configurations that are the same as the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation, or that have the same functions as those of the pachinko game machine 1 although they are different in form, layout, etc., are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof are omitted. Differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 as the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounting movable body 32 is formed slightly larger than the mounting movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, the effect control board 12 is connected to a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. is possible. A button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the effect control CPU 120 can turn on/off the button LED 62.

FIG. 14-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 14-3(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-3(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss", "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-3(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while it is performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is resumed after the power supply is temporarily stopped. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure restoration designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise designates initialization. Send command.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D100 is a customer waiting demonstration specification command for specifying the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, and as will be described later, is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the special symbol normal processing. This is a command transmitted according to the demonstration display setting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration specification command, the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-3(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, and these commands may be used instead of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 14-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-4, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each random number MR4 for is controlled to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. As will be described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit set in the RAM 102, and updates various numerical data by software. Numerical data representing part of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 14-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (about 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (about 1 in this embodiment /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 14-5 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the special figure game of the first special figure and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 14-6(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment, when it is determined to control to the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", the jackpot type can be any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" that are executed and shift to a high-probability high base state, and high-probability low base state in which high-probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time-saving control is not executed. "Variable probability big hit C" to shift, and "non-variable big hit" to shift to the low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on the "probability variable jackpot C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed, and a special game is played in each round. It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 second in this embodiment). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

In other words, in this embodiment, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 14-7) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. Since it is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a predetermined number of special figure games (100 times in this embodiment) are executed, or the predetermined number of special figures The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure In addition, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

Figure 14-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the super reach fluctuation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, . , a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Also, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one type of super reach variation pattern may be used like the normal reach variation pattern.

In addition, the variation pattern in this embodiment includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern. Further, among the variation patterns of super reach, the variation patterns of super reach β and super reach γ have a variable display period (60 seconds) longer than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the variation pattern of super reach α. It is

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from these random values for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 14-8 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), when the variable display result is a non-probable variable big hit in the normal game state (low base state), select the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot) and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A Determine from In addition, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and variation is performed using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot) and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is different. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. assigned. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern of super reach is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Since the super reach β is easier to determine than the super reach α, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in this embodiment, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big win C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α fluctuation pattern) and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α deviation) and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α deviation) and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

Thus, when the variable display result is "missing" in this embodiment, the special figure variable display time is normal based on the number of pending memories of the variable special figure being 3 or 4 etc. Since the ratio of execution of variable display is increased by the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3) shorter than the non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-1), the game is prevented from being slowed down. At the same time, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the high base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and hit the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot) and PB1-4 (super reach γ It is determined from the variation pattern of the jackpot). Further, when the variable display result is the probability variable big win A or the probability variable big win B in the low base state, the big win variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big win variation pattern determination table B PB1-1. Determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot) .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B, the determination values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 have different quotas. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. 250 decision values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 50 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. , PB1-4 are assigned 400 decision values. That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern is easily determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in this embodiment, since the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big win C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α) and PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach β) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 10 decision values are assigned to PA2-3 and 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-4.

That is, in this embodiment, if the variable display result in the high base state (time saving state) is "off", based on the time saving state, the special figure variable display time is normal non-reach deviation variation Since the rate of execution of the variable display increases due to the shortening variation pattern (PA1-4) shorter than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display result is displayed next while preventing the game from being slowed down. It is possible to shorten the period until a big hit is achieved. Incidentally, the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are fluctuation patterns that can be executed only in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in this embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game A control counter setting section and a game control buffer setting section are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage part stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-2 is provided with a production control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display being executed by the reserved storage of the first special figure, the buffer number 1-1 to the buffer number 1 corresponding to the reserved storage 1 to 4 of the first special figure -4, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display being executed by the second special figure pending storage, buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the second special figure pending storage 1 to 4 The data constituting the receive command buffer at the time of start winning, which is associated with each, is set with entries that can store data such as start winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, pending memory number notification commands, etc. It is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting section. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. Then, the four commands of the starting point winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command, which constitute one set, are the buffer numbers corresponding to the starting point winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. is stored in the entry of

The storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to the buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure are the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1") when the start condition is satisfied. ) is shifted upward one by one as will be described later. , It is designed to be cleared in the special figure per waiting process that is executed when ending the variable display. Similarly, the storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to the buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure are the highest pending storage (buffer number "2 -1"), the variable display of the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later, and the buffer number "2-0" storing the content of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied. The stored contents are cleared in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The effect control CPU 120, at the time of start winning to the first start winning port, sends a command at the beginning of the empty entry of the buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 of the receive command buffer at the time of start winning (the lowest buffer number entry), and at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, store from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) of the empty entries among the buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. . At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the received command buffer at the time of start winning is the entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2- 0”) is deleted and stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (entry corresponding to buffer number “1-1” or “2-1”). and the stored contents of entries after the pending storage of the starting variable representation are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in the buffer number "1-1" Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". commands stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". be done. Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Direction during Super Reach)
Here, the effect during super reach will be described with reference to FIG. 14-9. FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode after starting the variable display. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, the super reach effect (weak super reach effect and strong super reach effect) is performed as a variable display effect based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and the super reach effect is performed. After finishing the ready-to-win production, the variable display of the decoration pattern is ended.

In addition, in the normal reach effect in the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the effect control CPU 120 has the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a big hit as an effect different from the variable display effect. It is possible to execute the announcement effect A or the announcement effect B that announces the degree). In addition, in the normal ready-to-win effect in the super ready-to-win variation pattern, it is possible to execute a developing effect A for notifying that the effect will develop into a weak super ready-to-win effect (contents advantageous to the player).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a development effect B that informs that the weak super reach effect in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) develops into a strong super reach effect (advantageous content for the player). It is possible to execute a development suggestive production that suggests the possibility of being executed, and in the weak super reach production in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach β, γ), develop into a strong super reach production (advantageous for the player content) can be executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a determined effect to notify that the variable display result will be a big hit or lose in the strong super reach effect in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ). .

In this way, in the normal reach loss variation pattern, the normal reach production does not develop into a weak super reach production and becomes a big hit or a loss, and in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach production is a weak super reach production. In the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach production develops into a strong super reach production.

That is, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reach with higher expectations than weak super reach (jackpot expectation; normal reach < super reach α<super reach β<super reach γ).

In addition, in normal reach and super reach α, β, γ, different types of normal reach production and super reach production may be executed, and common or at least partially similar types of super reach production may be performed. It may be configured to be executed. Also, the types of super reach are not limited to the above three types, and may be one type, two types, or four or more types.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, in the above-described advance notice effects A and B, development effects A and B, development suggestive effects, and final effects, the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, is moved, and a first pseudo movable body display described later is performed. It is possible to move and display the second pseudo movable body display. Therefore, before describing the specific contents of each effect, the mounting movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, and the second pseudo-movable body display will be described.

(Flow of pachinko machine development)
First, in order to understand how the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, the second pseudo-movable body display, etc., the development of the pachinko machine 1 An outline of the flow of is described with reference to FIGS. 14-12. 14-12 are explanatory diagrams outlining the flow of development of pachinko gaming machines.

As shown in Figure 14-12, when the development of a given pachinko game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) starts, the first thing to do is to clarify what to convey to the game parlors and players and what they want the players to feel. A written proposal is created (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game contents, highlights, specs, game flow, production structure such as reach, board structure, movable bodies (structures), etc. are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (primary prototype, design mockup) of the board surface (game board), images and materials that can be used to visualize variable displays, specifications confirmation tables, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but there were reasons why multiple movable bodies could not be mounted (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc.) durability) may occur.

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the production image, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that occurred in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display image that imitates this non-mounted movable body is created. . In addition, since the movement display in the pseudo movable body display is less impactful than the case of moving the non-mounted movable body, for example, when the movement display is stopped, the reaction display operation and the movement display speed It is often displayed deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board surface (game board) including images such as variable displays and effects is created, and the variable displays, core effects, movements of movable bodies, etc. are confirmed (Step 241SGS004), If there is no problem, the board surface (game board) is produced (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by mounting a plurality of movable bodies capable of providing an impactful presentation to the player, the presentation effect can be enhanced and the presentation can be diversified. It is often difficult to mount multiple Therefore, based on the design and operation of a movable body that could not be mounted, a moving display of a pseudo-movable body display simulating this non-mounted movable body is often used.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko game machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, it was planned to mount a plurality of movable bodies in the development stage, but due to the various problems described above, one movable body ( For example, the mounting movable body 32) was determined to be mounted, and the other movable bodies (for example, the first non-mounting movable body M100 and the second non-mounting movable body M200) were not decided to be mounted and were not mounted. Instead of the first non-mounting movable body M100 and the second non-mounting movable body M200, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display simulating the first non-mounting movable body M100 and the second non-mounting movable body M200 are simulated. It is assumed that the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display is adopted.

In the above description, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, which are finally not mounted. It is not limited, and although it was possible to mount a movable body, there are cases where pseudo-movable body display is used to diversify the production. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable object display simulating a movable object that is not planned to be installed in the development stage (for example, a virtual movable object or a movable object that is or will be installed in another model).

(Mounting movable body 32)
The mounting movable body 32 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 14-13. 14-13, (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 14-13(A), the mounting movable body 32 is composed of a directing section 32A, which is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and whose front surface is decorated, and a mechanical section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism portion 32B extending to the left and right sides are respectively supported by the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, whereby the upper origin position (FIG. 14-13 (A )) and an effect position below the origin position (the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-13A). The mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the effect section 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L and 201R include mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R, drive gears 203L and 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R, and driven gears 204L and 204R meshing with the drive gears 203L and 203R. , driven gears 204L and 204R fixed to the lower ends of rotating shafts 205L and 205R directed in the vertical direction, movable bodies 206L and 206R inserted into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, and mounting movable body 32 are held at the origin position. It mainly has mounting movable body solenoids 207L and 207R that can be mounted, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 14-2) that can emit a light emitting part 208A that is built in the effect part 32A and that is composed of the character "X".

The mounting movable body 32 has left and right end portions (guided portions) of the mechanism portion 32B inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and engaged with the mounting movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. is held at the origin position. When the mounting movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the locked state is released while the mounting movable body 32 is held at the origin position, the mounting movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position by its own weight, and left and right ends of the mechanism section 32B. contacts the moving bodies 206L and 206R to restrict downward movement, thereby stopping at the performance position.

A spiral groove portion 205A is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portion 205A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the moving bodies 206L and 206R. and rotation around the rotation shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotation shafts 205L and 205R can be moved forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the rendering position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. , 205R are rotated to lift the movable bodies 206L and 206R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R are lifted from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-14. 14-14, (A) is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the display of the first pseudo movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

The first pseudo movable object display Z100 shown in FIG. 14-14(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 14-14(B), but was not installed due to various circumstances. It is an image imitating the first non-mounting movable body M100.

The first non-mounting movable body M100 which is not mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and decorated on the front surface, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism portion M100B extending to the left is supported by the driving mechanism M101 arranged on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 14B) 14-14(B)) and a first rendering position below the first origin position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 14-14(B)).

The drive mechanism M101 includes a movable motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, and a driven gear M104 fixed to the lower end facing the vertical direction. A rotating shaft M105, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounting movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and built in the effect section M100A, as viewed from the front. It mainly has a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) capable of emitting a circular light emitting portion M108A.

In addition, the production section M100A has four production movable sections M110A to M110D which are arranged around the light emitting section M108A, and which are arranged in the vicinity of the light emitting section M108A. It is possible to change between an effect state (the state indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-14(B)) and a second effect state in which the effect movable parts M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting part M108A.

The first non-mounting movable body M100 is inserted (guided) by the rotating shaft M105 so that the left end (guided portion) of the mechanism portion M100B is movable in the vertical direction, and is locked by the movable body solenoid M107. 1 It is held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while being held at the first origin position and the locked state is released, the first non-mounting movable body M100 drops from the first origin position by its own weight, and the mechanism part M100B. The left and right ends of the contact with the moving body M106 restricts its downward movement, thereby stopping at the first effect position.

A helical groove portion M105A is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating shaft M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portion M105A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the moving body M106, and Since the rotation around the rotating shaft M105 is restricted, the movable body motor M102 rotates the rotating shaft M105 in the forward and reverse directions so that it can move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the first non-mounting movable body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first rendering position by its own weight. By raising it, it rises from the first effect position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 14-14(A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image simulating the first non-mounted movable body M100, and an effect display part Z100A corresponding to the effect part M100A and a mechanism part It has a mechanism display section Z100B corresponding to M100B and a light emitting display section Z108A corresponding to the light emitting section M108A. Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 14-16 (B)). ), and can be vertically moved and displayed between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position (Fig. 14-17(A)). In addition, the production section M100A has production movable display parts Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the production movable parts M110A to M110D, and a first production display state corresponding to the first production state and a second production display state corresponding to the second production state. It is possible to change to the production display state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-15. 14-15, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the display of the second pseudo movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in FIG. 14-15(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIGS. The image simulates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that is mounted.

Regarding the second non-mounting movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operation modes at the beginning of development (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 14-15 (B) and FIG. 14-15 (C) Mounting plan 2) was devised, but for the convenience of development, the second non-mounting movable body itself could not be mounted. Display and moving display corresponding to mounting plan 2 are made executable.

As shown in FIGS. 14-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front surface with the effect part M200A. and the lower end of the mechanism portion M100B is supported by the first drive mechanism M201A arranged below the image display device 5 (mounting plan 1: FIG. 14-15 ( B)), and a second effect device (mounting plan 2: see FIG. 14-15(C)) in which the upper end of the mechanism part M100B is supported by the second driving mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5. is incorporated in each of the

As shown in FIG. 14-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A includes a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, and a rotating body rotated by the movable body motor (not shown). It has M203 and a guide rail M204 that guides the production part M200A so as to be movable in the vertical direction. One end of the mechanism portion M200B is rotatably supported on the base member M202 about a rotation shaft facing in the front-rear direction. A long hole M206 is formed into which it can be inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounting movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A rotates the rotating body M203 by a movable body motor (not shown) and rotates the mechanism part M200B around the rotation axis, The first specific origin position below (origin position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-15 (B)) and the first specific effect position above the first specific origin position (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 14-15 (B)) position).

In addition, the effect part M200A includes a rotating part M207 that is circular in front view, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can emit light from a plurality of (for example, five) light emitting parts M208A to M208E provided in the rotating part M207. , and while the rotating part M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, and the light emitting parts M208A to M208E can emit light in a plurality of colors (for example, 7 colors). there is

14-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B includes a movable motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable motor M212, and a driven gear meshing with the drive gear M213. It mainly has M214 and a rotation shaft M215 directed in the left-right direction to which the driven gear M214 is fixed at the left end. In addition, a spiral groove portion M215A is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating shaft M215, while a mechanism portion M200B extending upward from the effect portion M200A is provided on the inner peripheral surface thereof so as to be engaged with the groove portion M215A. A portion (not shown) is formed, and rotation about the rotation axis M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounting movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B rotates the rotating shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, thereby moving the left second specific origin position (FIG. 14-15 (C ) and the second specific effect position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 14-15 (C)), and the second specific origin It can be stopped at a second intermediate effect position between the position and the second specific effect position.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image simulating the second non-mounting movable body M200, and the effect display part Z200A corresponding to the effect part M200A and the mechanical part It has a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to M200B, a rotating display section Z207 corresponding to the rotating section M207, and light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to the light emitting sections M208A to M208E.

In addition, at the beginning of development, we planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, we were forced to install a single color LED, but the second pseudo movable body display Z200 As a result, the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E can emit light in a plurality of colors (for example, seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (FIGS. 14-16). (C)), it is possible to move and display in the horizontal direction between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position (Fig. 14-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17. 14-16, (A) shows the movable range of the non-mounted movable object, (B) shows the movement display area of the first pseudo-movable object display, and (C) shows the movement display area of the second pseudo-movable object display. It is a diagram. 14-17 are diagrams showing (A) the specific movement display area of the first pseudo-moving object display, and (B) the specific movement display area of the second pseudo-moving object display.

As shown in FIG. 14-16(A), the mounting movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the effect part 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the approximate position of the display area of the image display device 5. It is movable in the vertical direction between an effect position where the effect part 32A and the mechanism part 32B overlap at the center, and the movement distance from the origin position to the effect position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 14-16(B), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 includes a first initial display position where the lower part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5, A first effect display position in which the effect display section Z100A and the mechanism display section Z100B are displayed at a substantially central lower position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first initial display can be displayed in the vertical direction. The movement display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 14-17(A), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , and a first specific effect display position where the effect display section Z100A and the mechanism display section Z100B are displayed at a substantially central upper position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific effect display position. A specific movement display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L2A.

In this manner, the first pseudo movable object display Z100, similarly to the first non-mounting movable object M100, is the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. In addition to being able to move and display the movable range between the two in the vertical direction, it is also possible to move specifically between a second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and a second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position. The range can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16(C), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is a first specific initial stage in which the lower part of the effect display section Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. and a first specific effect display position where the effect display section Z200A and the mechanism display section Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and can be displayed by moving vertically between the display position and the display position, and The movement display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-17(B), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is a second specific display in which the right portion of the effect display portion Z200A is displayed at the left portion position of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the horizontal direction between the initial display position and a second specific effect display position where the effect display section Z200A and the mechanism display section Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5. , the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, has a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific effect corresponding to the first specific effect position. In addition to being able to move and display the movable range between the display positions in the vertical direction, a second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and a second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position A specific movable range between the positions can be moved and displayed in the horizontal direction.

Further, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. (L2>L1>L3). Further, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. or longer than the movement display distance L2A (L3A>L2A>L1).

Thus, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can move and display movement display distances (L2, L2A, L3A) longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect with more impact than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIGS. 14-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of effect display portions Z100A and Z200A and mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B, and mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B. is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that the driving mechanism M101, the first driving mechanism M201A, and the second driving mechanism M201B, which are arranged on the side of the image display device 5, produce effects. Since the display parts Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to express moving display more realistically.

That is, the pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) refers to movable objects such as movable objects mounted on the pachinko machine 1, movable objects not mounted, virtual movable objects, etc., as structures that can be operated by the drive mechanism. It is a simulated display, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 14-25(H)).

In addition, display in which a part of the display mode is different from the modeled movable body, display in a mode that cannot be realized with the modeled movable body (for example, deformed display, deformation display, etc.), movement display (for example, high-speed movement display, etc.) ) is possible.

In addition, the pseudo-moving object display (pseudo-moving object image) may be an image or moving image created by a computer or the like, or an image or moving image of an actually created movable object as a structure. There may be. Furthermore, when the pseudo-moving object display is displayed, a sound effect that is the same as or similar to the sound effect that is output when the movable object is moving or the impact sound that is generated when the moving object is stopped is output, or the pseudo-moving object display is produced. When the position is reached, the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, or the like, or the loud bass is output from the speakers 8L, 8R to generate a pseudo-impact. It is possible to provide a performance to the player.

Next, details of various presentations using the mounting movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-10. FIGS. 14-10 are diagrams for explaining the contents and configurations of various effects in super ready-to-win.

(Notice production A)
As shown in FIG. 14-10, the advance notice effect A can be executed when the base state is low, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then the first specific effect is executed. After being moved to the display position and displayed, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are light-emitting and displayed in a color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, suggesting the possibility (expectation) of a big win.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYA-1 is determined in the advance notice effect A type determination processing of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when the pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light is emitted. The display portions Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, and when the pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when the pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. displayed in red. Therefore, the luminous display color of the luminous display portions Z208A to Z208E with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit is red. The color of the emitted light can be changed in various ways, and when a big win is confirmed, the light may be emitted in gold, rainbow color, or the like.

(Notice production B)
The advance notice effect B can be executed in the high base state, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 changes from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. Depending on whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to either the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position, the variable display result is a big hit. It suggests the possibility (expectation) of becoming

Also, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (FIG. 14-34 (A) ~ (C) reference). Also, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (Fig. 14-34 (D) (See (F)).

Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIG. 14-33). (A) to (C)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIG. 14-33). (D)-(F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the advance notice effect B type determination process of step 241SGS278A to be described later, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position. When the pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-3 is determined, the 1 pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. Moves to display position. Therefore, when the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner, the expectation for a big hit is higher than when the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner. The pseudo movable body display Z100 becomes a pattern in which it is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. It is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development production A)
In development effect A, development to weak super reach is announced by moving (falling) the mounting movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). The mounting movable body 32 moved from the origin position to the performance position rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after the lapse of a predetermined time.

Specifically, when the execution is determined in the development effect A type determination processing of step 241SGS278B described later, the mounting movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position at the effect start timing, thereby developing into weak super reach. is reported (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the mounting movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the timing of starting the effect, and the development to weak super reach is notified by displaying the development notification image Z300 on the image display device 5. (See Figure 14-25 (G)). In other words, the fact that non-execution is determined in the development effect A type determination processing means that the effect pattern is determined to notify the development to weak super reach by displaying the development notification image Z300 without dropping the mounted movable body 32. is.

Note that the development notification image Z300 is an image (display) imitating the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is displayed in the same way as the movable body. Unlike the pseudo-movable object display that is displayed moving, this is an image (display) that imitates only the effect part 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable object 32 . For example, at the production start timing, it is displayed at the production display position corresponding to the production position of the mounted movable body 32 from the beginning without moving display.

(development suggestion production)
The development suggestive effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position. After that, light is emitted based on detection of a repeated operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation effective period during which the continuous operation of the push button 31B (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a predetermined period) is valid. When the display portions Z208A to Z208E change to the light emitting display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, the display color of the character image Z310 described later, that is, the possibility that the development effect B will be executed is suggested.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image simulating the push button 31B, etc.) that promotes the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B in the operation effective period in which the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion effect is valid. is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the button LED 62 (see FIG. 14-2) built into the push button 31B is illuminated to promote repeated pressing of the push button 31B. However, the image display device 5 may display an operation prompting display that encourages repeated pressing of the push button 31B during the valid period of operation.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is a character image Z310 related to the model that is displayed in the first specific display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act on) the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 14-26 (A) to (J) and Figure 14-27 (A)).

More specifically, when the pattern PS-1 is determined in the development suggestion effect type determination processing of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed. When the pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change in order from white to blue in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and when the pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E. changes in the order of white→blue→green in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B. When the pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Changes from green to red. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E having the highest degree of expectation for execution of the development effect B is red.

In addition, the emission color and the change pattern of the emission color can be changed in various ways. For example, the emission color may be changed from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the emission display color may be a color other than white from the beginning. . In addition, the number of lights of the plurality of light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is increased in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and the execution expectation of the development effect B is higher when the number of lights is larger than when the number of lights is small. may Further, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the color of emitted light and the number of emitted lights.

Further, in the characteristic part 241SG, if the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period or the continuous pressing operation amount is small, even if any of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined, has exemplified a configuration in which the light emitting display color does not change according to each of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period. Alternatively, even if the amount of continuous hit operation is small, the light emitting display color may be changed according to the determined patterns PS-2 to PS-4 at the timing when the valid operation period expires.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color corresponding to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. there is

Note that the character image Z310 of a different type may be displayed according to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period expires. In addition, even if any of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined as described above, even if the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E do not change, the determined patterns PS-2 to PS-4 A character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E) may be displayed. Further, the light emission display color of the light emission display portions Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development production B)
Developing effect B is that the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super ready-to-win effect and executing a determined effect (game Advantageous content for the user) is notified (see FIG. 14-27(D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (Fig. 14-27 ( D) to (F)).

Further, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, the reach title is displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the display of the image is started, the variable display result becomes a big win (controlled to a big win game state). ) is suggested.

Specifically, when execution is determined in the development effect B type determination processing of step 241 SGS280, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing. By moving and displaying, the development to strong super reach is announced (see FIG. 14-27(D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. is displayed in a ready state mode to announce the development to strong super reach (see FIG. 14-27(C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development effect B type determination processing, the ready-to-reach title image Z51 is displayed in a state of preparation without moving and displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, and the strong super-reach is achieved. It is to determine the effect pattern that informs the development of.

(Decision production)
The final effect is an effect to settle the battle confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character executed in the super ready-to-win effect, and notify whether or not the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after displaying the ally character giving the final blow to the enemy character, a display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. or at the timing when the effective operation period ends without detection of the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the enemy character Either a big hit confirmation notification that the player wins the battle by defeating the player or a failure confirmation notification that the mounted movable body 32 is knocked down by an enemy character without being moved from the original position to the performance position and loses the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the result of the variable display is a failure, and are patterns in which a confirmation notification is made that the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle. KV-2 is selected when the result of the variable display is a big win, and is a pattern in which a confirmation of the big win is announced in which the ally character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing at which the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Then, a vibration performance is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

Further, when execution of the pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination processing of step 241 SGS282 to be described later, the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounting movable body 32 falls. , a big hit is announced, and after returning from the performance position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the decorative pattern is variable. Display resumes. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a big hit (Fig. 14) -29 (E) to (G), see FIGS. 14-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, when the execution of pattern KB-1 or KV-1 is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not move from the origin position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and an effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. Loss determination notification is performed, and the variable display result is a loss (see FIGS. 14-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, about the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the execution status of the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200. , with reference to FIGS. 14-11. FIG. 14-11 is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the execution status of the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of symbols based on the variation patterns of super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed. Pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above description, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to increase in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C<pattern D. That is, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. When the development performance A is not executed and the development performance B is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) is higher. Further, the rate of control to the big win game state when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed is higher than the case where the development performance A is executed without the development performance B being executed (big win expectation). is high. In addition, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

14-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 241SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, selects a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the variation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277), and when it is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277 ; Y), executing the notice effect type determination processing shown in FIGS. 21(A) is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the development effect A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When it is not the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, in the announcement effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, since the target of the notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (variable big hit A, big win B, big win C, non-variable big win) or loses. Which one is specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach can be specified by the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of the variable probability big win C may be excluded from the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is a low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), a random number for determining the notice effect is extracted, and the effect pattern of the notice effect A is determined using the notice effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 14-20(A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in the low base state, that is, if it is in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), the random number for determining the notice effect is extracted, and the table B for determining the notice effect type shown in FIG. 14-20(B) is extracted. is used to determine the effect pattern of the advance notice effect B (step 241SGS304).

As shown in FIG. 14-20(A), in the advance notice effect A type determination table, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" For each, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot (any of probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, or probability variable jackpot C), if it becomes a non-variable jackpot, if super reach is lost, if normal reach is lost are assigned different determination values so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYA-1", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYA-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-1", and 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-2". , “Pattern PYA-3” is assigned 50 determination values, and “Pattern PYA-4” is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is super reach out, 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-1", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-2". , “Pattern PYA-3” are assigned 15 determination values, and “Pattern PYA-4” is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is out of normal reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-1", and 10 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display becomes a probability variable jackpot, the "pattern PYA-4" is determined at the highest rate, and when it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, the "pattern "PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PYA-1" is determined at the highest rate when super reach or normal reach is lost. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest expectation for a big hit, and "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1" have the lowest expectations for a big hit. Become. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 14-20(B), in the advance notice effect B type determination table, "pattern PYB-1", "pattern PYB-2", "pattern PYB-3", and "pattern PYB-4" For each, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot (any of probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, or probability variable jackpot C), if it becomes a non-variable jackpot, if super reach is lost, if normal reach is lost are assigned different determination values so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20(B) is obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", and 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2". , “pattern PYB-3” is assigned 50 determination values, and “pattern PYB-4” is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is super reach out, 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2". , “pattern PYB-3” is assigned 15 determination values, and “pattern PYB-4” is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is out of normal reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", and 10 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the probability variable jackpot is determined in the variable display, the "pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate, and when the non-probability variable jackpot is determined, the "pattern PYB-3" is determined at the highest rate, and when super reach or normal reach is lost, "pattern PYB-1" is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "pattern PYB-4" has the highest degree of expectation for a big hit, and "pattern PYB-3"> "pattern PYB-3"> "pattern PYB-2"> "pattern PYB-1" has the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit in that order. Become. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In the characterizing portion 241SG, the table for determining the advance notice effect A type for the low base state and the table for deciding the advance notice effect B type for the high base state are exemplified as having the same decision ratio for each pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different between the table for determining the type of advance notice effect A and the table for determining the type of notice effect B.

Returning to FIG. 14-19, in step 241SGS305, the advance notice effect type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306 to set the period until the start of the effect to the announcement effect start waiting timer (step 241SGS306), and terminates the processing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development effect A type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this characteristic portion 241SG, since the target of the development effect A is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (variable big win A, big win B, big win C, non-variable big win) or It suffices to specify by the variable display result designation command whether it is a loss or not, and to specify by the fluctuation pattern designation command whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of the probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the object of the development effect A.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the development effect type determination random number, and determines the effect pattern of the development effect A using the development effect A type determination table shown in FIG. ).

As shown in FIG. 14-21(B), in the development effect A type determination table, the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, any of the probability variable jackpot C), when it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, when super reach is lost, when normal reach is lost Different judgment values are shown in FIG. 14-21 (B) It is assigned to be a value number.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" when the variable display result is out of normal reach. That is, when the normal reach is lost, the development effect A is not executed because the weak super reach effect is not developed.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "execution" is determined at the highest percentage, and if the super reach or normal reach is lost "Non-execution" is determined with the highest percentage. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the development effect A is executed than when it is not executed. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the development effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, sets the period until the start of the development effect A start waiting timer (step 241SGS314), and terminates the processing.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern in the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 241 SGS279), and super reach variation If it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), the development suggestive effect type determination processing shown in FIG. 241SGS280), executes the development performance B type determination processing shown in FIG. A) is performed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the determined effect in the variable display by executing the determination process for determining effect B type shown in A) (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach variation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), it progresses to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-22(A), the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern in the development suggestive effect type determination process (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, since the target of the notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (variable big hit A, big win B, big win C, non-variable big win) or loses. Which one is specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach can be specified by the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of the variable probability big win C may be excluded from the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the random number for determining the development-suggestion effect, and determines the effect pattern of the development-suggestion effect using the table for determining the type of development-suggestion effect shown in FIG. ).

As shown in FIG. 14-22(B), in the development suggestion production type determination table, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" For each, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot (any of probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, or probability variable jackpot C), if it becomes a non-variable jackpot, if super reach is lost, if normal reach is lost are assigned different determination values so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", and 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-2". , "pattern PS-3" is assigned 50 determination values, and "pattern PS-4" is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is super reach out, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2". , "Pattern PS-3" are assigned 15 determination values, and "Pattern PS-4" is assigned 5 determination values.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display becomes a probability variable jackpot, the "pattern PS-4" is determined with the highest ratio, and when it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, the "pattern PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and if super reach is lost, "pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "pattern PS-4" has the highest expectation for a big hit, and "pattern PS-4" > "pattern PS-3" > "pattern PS-2" > "pattern PS-1" has the lowest expectations for a big hit. Become. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestive effect type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, a period until the start of the effect is set in the development suggestion effect start waiting timer (step 241SGS324), and the processing is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23A, in the development effect B type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, since the target of the notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (variable big hit A, big win B, big win C, non-variable big win) or loses. Which one is specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach can be specified by the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of the variable probability big win C may be excluded from the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the random number for determining the development effect and determines the effect pattern of the development effect B using the development effect B type determination table shown in FIG. 14-23(B) (step 241 SGS332). .

As shown in FIG. 14-23(B), in the development effect B type determination table, the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, any of the probability variable jackpot C), when it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, when super reach is lost, when normal reach is lost Different judgment values are shown in FIG. 14-23 (B) It is assigned to be a value number.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are allocated to “execution”. . In addition, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" when the variable display result is out of super reach α. That is, when the super reach α is lost, the development effect B is not executed because the strong super reach effect is not developed.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "execution" is determined at the highest percentage, and if the super reach or normal reach is lost "Non-execution" is determined with the highest percentage. In other words, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the development effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, the period until the start of the development effect B start waiting timer is set (step 241SGS334), and the processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(A), in the decided effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decided effect type shown in FIG. The effect pattern of the determined effect is determined using the table for determination (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined effect type is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the determined effect (step 241SGS343), and the processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(B), in the determination effect type determination table, the operation of the push button 31B is validated, and an operation prompting display prompting the player to single-press the push button 31B is displayed. KB-1", "Pattern KB-2", "Pattern KV-1", "Pattern KV- 2”, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot (any of probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, or probability variable jackpot C), when it becomes a non-variability jackpot, and when super reach is lost Different decision values are assigned so as to have the number of decision values shown in FIG. 14-24(B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern KB-2", and 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern KB-2", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". ing. In addition, when the variable display result is super reach β/γ deviation, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1". is assigned.

By assigning the determination value in this way, when the probability variable jackpot is achieved in the variable display, the "pattern KV-1" in which the operation object is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest rate, and the non-probability variable jackpot is determined. , the "Pattern KB-2" in which the push button 31B is the operation target is determined at the highest rate. ” is determined by the highest percentage. In other words, when the stick controller 31A is operated, the degree of expectation for the probability variable big hit is higher than when the push button 31B is operated. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In this characteristic part 241SG, the random number for determining the advance effect, the random number for determining the development effect A, the random number for determining the development suggestive effect, the random number for determining the development effect B, and the random number for determining the final effect are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100. and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of determination values of these various random numbers for determining effects is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these random numbers for determining effects can be set as appropriate. should be decided. In addition, a random number counter for effect determination for generating these various random numbers for determination of effect is set in the RAM 122, and the random number counter for effect determination is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing. Further, a common random number may be used as these random numbers for determining various effects.

In addition, in this characterizing section 241SG, the form of determining the effect pattern of various effects in the various effect type determination processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to determine the execution of a notice effect such as a character notice effect, a step-up notice in which the notice image changes in stages, and a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area. is determined, the timing for starting the notice performance differs depending on the manner of the notice performance, so a different period corresponding to the manner of the notice performance may be set in the timer for waiting for the start of notice performance to be described later.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, at step 241SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 241SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data during variable display, including image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, into the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, the variable display of decorative patterns and the display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β production operation)
Next, an example of the effect operation of super reach β will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-25 to 14-31. 14-25, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach β mainly in normal reach. 14-26, (A) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of effect operations mainly in weak super reach. FIGS. 14-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of effect operation in the same weak super reach. 14-28, (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing an example of effect operation in strong super reach. FIGS. 14-29 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the strong super reach effect (E) to (J). 14-30, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation after notification of the confirmation of a big hit. 14-31, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the details of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable object display. FIG. 14-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display section and the mounted movable body LED.

Hereinafter, examples of various effect operations in the variable display period based on the variation pattern of super reach β will be described.

As shown in FIG. 14-25(A), the effect control CPU 120 variably displays decorative patterns in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β based on the occurrence of the start winning. to start. In addition, at the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "2"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), and a small number corresponding to the decoration pattern A display area 5SL for displaying patterns (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

Note that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z100 and the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbols, and the error display (not shown). Since it is displayed on the front side (higher layer) than the movable object display Z200, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 overlap, and the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, and the number of small While the visibility of the pattern and error display is prevented from deteriorating, the decorative pattern is displayed on the back side (lower layer) than the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from deteriorating due to the overlapping of the decoration patterns.

After the start of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), when the variable display mode is the normal reach display mode, the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decoration pattern is started.

As shown in FIG. 14-25(C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the advance notice effect A after a predetermined time has passed since the normal ready-to-win display mode was set. 14-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. By light-emitting the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1-4), a notice effect A suggesting control to a big win game state is executed. Also, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position.

Note that the effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the luminescent display color of the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208E is white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208A to Z208E are displayed based on the pattern PYA-4. When the luminescent display color of Z208E is red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size is increased according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-25(F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, the second By erasing the pseudo movable object display Z200, the advance notice effect A is terminated. After that, in the display area 5SR provided on the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed in a mode slightly larger than the small pattern.

Then, when it is determined that the development effect A is not to be executed in the development effect A type determination processing of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 32 is not dropped and held at the origin position, the development notification image Z300 is displayed, and the effect image Z61A is displayed around it to notify that the weak super reach performance will develop. Further, when execution of development effect A is determined, as shown in FIG. 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it to notify development of weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the mounting movable body 32 is executed as the development effect A, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when it is not executed, but the development effect A (mounting movable body 32 Even if it is decided not to execute the fall), by displaying the development notification image Z300, it is possible to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 14-26(A), the effect control CPU 120 starts the low super ready-to-win effect by displaying the character image Z310 after the execution period of the development effect A ends, and the second pseudo After the movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, it is moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position, and the development suggestive effect is started (see FIG. 14-26(B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed such that a portion thereof overlaps the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position as a development suggestive effect, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are light-emitting and displayed in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit. , to facilitate the operation of push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-moving object display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to PS-4) is determined in the development suggestion performance type determination processing of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. , the effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the continuous hit operation (the number of times the operation is detected). Suggest that B is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-26(E), even after the operation effective period ends, the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E are maintained while the background image is darkened for blackout display. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E when the operation effective period ends is displayed above the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, and the character image Z310 is displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasis (see FIG. 14-26(F)), the character image Z310 is once erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(G)), and then After displaying the character image Z310 of the size (see FIG. 14-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(I)). A character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(J)).

Incidentally, in FIGS. 14-26E to 14-26J, it is preferable that the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E continue to emit light, but the effect image Z62 is not displayed, in consideration of the appearance of the presentation.

In this way, the character image Z310 of the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E is displayed in such a manner that it gradually becomes larger from the back side to the front side of the screen, and the character images Z310 of small size, medium size, and large size are displayed. When doing so, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-26(J) in FIG. 14-27, the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position. By overlapping at least a part of Z200 on the front side and making it possible to visually recognize the second pseudo movable body display Z200 through the overlapping area, the expectation for the execution of the development effect B is more suitable. can be aroused by

In addition, since the character image Z310 is displayed with priority over the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. While diverting the player's attention, the display of the character image Z310 can favorably suggest that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, although the character image Z310 was displayed in a manner of gradually increasing in size, at least the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was displayed in an area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. You may display so that it overlaps on the near side of a part. Further, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestive image so as to overlap at least a part of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on the near side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), the effect control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from the first specific effect display position to the second position while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. 1 Delete (hide) without moving to a specific initial display position. Specifically, as an erasing display for emphasizing that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 has been erased, it is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out. Thereafter, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being hidden in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the characteristic part 241SG, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Although the mode of erasing (hiding) without moving and displaying from the display position to the first specific initial display position has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. 14-26 (F). When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the display, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed as a first specific effect display while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. Z200 may be faded out, moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and erased (hidden).

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), at the start timing of the development effect B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if non-execution of development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination processing of step 241SGS281, as shown in FIG. It is erased without moving from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). By doing so, it is notified that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-27(D), when execution of the development effect B is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, it is notified that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotating display portion Z207 including the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208E is displayed. It is displayed in a manner rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. Also, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position.

It should be noted that the light emitting display colors of the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in FIG. The light emission display color is set according to the color of the effect image Z65, etc., which is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(E), a reach title image Z51, which will be described later, is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). As shown in 27(F), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is erased (hidden) from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position without being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(A), when the variable display mode is the super ready-to-win display mode, the effect control CPU 120 has a reach title indicating the type of the super ready-to-win effect and a reach indicating the expected degree of big hit. A title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super ready-to-win effect has developed. Next, a super ready-to-win effect (for example, an effect of displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confrontation), etc.) is started (see FIG. 14-28(B)). Then, when the pattern KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the determination effect type determination processing of step 241 SGS 282 at the timing when the predetermined time has passed since the super reach display mode was set, that is, the operation target is the push button. 31B, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C), an operation prompting image Z53 for prompting the player to press the push button 31B is displayed. On the other hand, when patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the determined effect type determination processing of step 241SGS282, that is, when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-28(D). , an operation prompting image Z54 for prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed.

The timing at which the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected in the operation effective period during which the operation prompting display is displayed, or the push At the timing when the operation effective period expires without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. is dropped from the origin position to the performance position on the front side of the display area, and an effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, according to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is lit in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color). light up.

Note that the effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters. is not limited to, and the effect image may have a mode different from that of the effect image Z71. For example, only a portion of the glass cracks and scatters as fragments, and the remaining portion is displayed in such a manner that the mounted movable body 32 is displayed overlapping the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in situations where it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to grasp what has happened over time.

Also in the effect image Z55, as in the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner has the mounting movable body 32 arranged on the front side of the image display device 5. Since the positional relationship between the mounting movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer by displaying a part of the image in reflection, it is possible to realize a display with a more three-dimensional effect.

After that, after moving the mounting movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. , As shown in FIG. 14-29(G), the combination of the big win symbols is temporarily stopped to inform the determination of the big win. Even if the combination of big winning symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-30(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5, and a first pseudo-movable image is displayed. The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(B), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display parts Z110A to Z110D are displayed in the first effect. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. In addition, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, it is the same as when the mounting movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 14-29 (E). Then, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light-emitting display section Z108A is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow colors).

Here, the details of the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 described in FIGS. 14-30 (A) and (B) are shown in FIGS. explain.

As shown in FIG. 14-31(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays, in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing a state in which glass cracks and a plurality of glass fragments scatter. At the same time, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Note that the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 so that a part thereof can be visually recognized below the mounting movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-31(B), when displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, The amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing glass fragments are increased from the state shown in -31(A), and the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed on the front side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first effect display position, the broken glass is more likely than the state shown in FIG. The amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing .

In this manner, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is displayed as the first initial display of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 according to the movement display of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100. position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, and only the image Z71A showing the broken glass in the effect image Z71 is moved from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. By displaying, it is possible not only to create a three-dimensional effect by the image Z71A that scatters around, but also to make the first pseudo movable object display Z100 look like a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(C), the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 can be seen through any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(D), one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is the first pseudo-moving body display By displaying a part of Z100 in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a more stereoscopic display can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then moves the effect movable display parts Z110A to Z110D to the first effect display. The state is changed to the second effect display state, and the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and then causes the light-emitting display section Z108A to move to the first period ta1-ta2 ( For example, after luminous display for 33 ms), a flashing display pattern that is not displayed for a second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33 ms) is displayed at the first effect display position. While repeating ta1 to ta4 multiple times, the mounted movable body LED 208 is lit for a first corresponding period (eg, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then a second corresponding period corresponding to the second period (eg, 40ms) is repeated multiple times over the performance periods ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by performing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same cycle, it is possible to make the presentation more suitable. In the first period ta1 to ta2, it is difficult to precisely match (synchronize) the time (eg, 33 ms) during which the light emitting display section Z108A is illuminated and the time (eg, 30 ms) during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated. Even in such a case, for example, by making the turn-off period of the mounting movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the difference between the light emission display of the light emitting display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounting movable body LED 208 increases with the passage of time. can be prevented.

Further, during the presentation periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration presentation may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing so, the production can be made more lively. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emitting display of the light emitting display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED208.

Returning to FIG. 14-30(C), the effect control CPU 120 restores the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second effect display state to the first effect display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative pattern. , After temporary stop display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, as shown in FIG. As shown in E), it is erased after moving and displaying to the first effect display position. Then, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols is stop-displayed, and the small symbols are also stop-displayed in combination with the big winning patterns.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounting movable body 32 and performing the notification of the determination of the big win, by executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. can be suitably realized by the player.

Returning to FIG. 14-29, during the operation valid period during which the operation prompting display is displayed, a single push operation of the push button 31B (a detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (a detection signal from the stick controller 31A) detection signal) is detected, or when the effective operation period expires without detection of a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A. As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed without executing the movable body effect in which the mounting movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area, As shown in FIG. 14-29(I), after displaying an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character, as shown in FIG. A stop display is performed to notify that the deviation is confirmed. In addition, in synchronization with the stop display of the combination of the winning symbols, the small symbols are stop-displayed with the combination of the losing symbols.

For example, if the push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and if the push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period, there will be a difference in the length of time afterward. The difference in scale caused by 1. 2. period of fluctuation of the decorative pattern until the design is determined; 2. display period of images Z55 to Z58; It may be absorbed by extending or shortening any period of the rendering period of the movable body rendering.

(Example of Super Reach γ production operation)
Next, an example of the effect operation of super reach γ will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-33 to 14-34. 14-33, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B in super reach γ. 14-34, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an effect operation example of the advance notice effect B in super reach γ.

In the following, an example of the effect operation of the notice effect B executed in the normal reach effect in the variation pattern of the super reach γ will be explained, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach effect is the same as that of the super reach β. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. Incidentally, the super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the game state is the high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(A), the effect control CPU 120, when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in step 241SGS278B in the process of determining the type of the effect for the effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect that the normal ready-to-win display mode is set to the normal ready-to-win display mode. At the start timing of effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it at the second intermediate effect display position (see FIG. 14-33(B)), a big hit can be achieved. A notice performance B suggesting control to a game state is executed. Also, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative design variably displayed in the decorative design display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position, so that it is variable in the decorative design display area 5L. Visual recognition of the displayed decoration pattern becomes difficult.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-33(C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non indicate.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(D), the effect control CPU 120, when the pattern PYB-2 is determined in step 241SGS278B in the process of determining the type of the effect for the effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the normal ready-to-win display mode is set to the normal ready-to-win display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 14-33 (E)), a big hit is achieved. A notice performance B suggesting control to a game state is executed. Also, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed to the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific effect display position, and is variable in the decorative pattern display area 5C. Visual recognition of the displayed decoration pattern becomes difficult.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-33(F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non indicate.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(A), the effect control CPU 120, when the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the step 241SGS278B in the process of determining the type of the effect for the effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the normal ready-to-win display mode is set to the normal ready-to-win display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, after displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the first effect display position (see FIG. 14-34 (B)), the jackpot game state is entered. Executes the advance notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed. Also, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable object display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative design displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position, so that the decorative design display area 5L is displayed. , 5C, and 5R, it becomes difficult to see some decorative patterns.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first effect display position to the first initial display position without moving and displaying it, as shown in FIG. 14-34(C). do.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(D), the effect control CPU 120, when the pattern PYB-4 is determined in step 241SGS278B in the process of determining the type of the effect for the effect, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect for the normal ready-to-win display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, after displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the second initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second effect display position (see FIG. 14-34 (E)), the jackpot game state is entered. Executes the advance notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed. Also, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable object display Z100 moved and displayed to the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative design displayed variably in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the decorative design display area 5L , 5C, and 5R, it becomes difficult to see some decorative patterns.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second effect display position to the second initial display position without moving and displaying it, as shown in FIG. 14-34(F). do.

(Pseudo movable object display and movable object)
Next, pseudo-movable object display and movable objects will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-35 to 14-40. FIGS. 14-35 are explanatory diagrams for comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. FIG. 14-36 is also an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. FIG. 14-37 is also an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. FIG. 14-38 is also an explanatory diagram for comparing the display of the pseudo movable object and the non-mounted movable object. FIG. 14-39 is also an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. FIG. 14-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo-moving object display and the second pseudo-moving object display.

As shown in FIG. 14-35, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is a first non-movable object that differs from the mounted movable object 32 in form, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 14-14(B). Although this is a pseudo-movable object display simulating the mounted movable object M100, both the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable object 32 are substantially the same positions above the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position. , and the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 are both positions below the first initial display position and the origin position. The downward direction is common to the direction of movement from the position to the effect position. In other words, both the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position above the display area of the image display device 5 or the origin position.

14-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is longer than the moving distance L1 to (L2>L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A′) to (C′), the mounted movable body 32 falls (moves) by its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower production position. While it takes about 300 ms, as shown in FIGS. 14-35(A) to (C), the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 moves from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first effect display. It takes about 100 ms to move and display to the position. In other words, the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is longer than the movement display distance of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. is also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mountable movable body M100 can be mounted and movable as a structure that can move in the same direction (for example, downward direction) as the first non-mountable movable body M100. In the case where it is possible to move and display in the same direction from substantially the same position as the body 32, the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is the movement display of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement from the origin position to the performance position faster than the movement, it is possible to perform performance with impact faster than the movement of the mounting movable body 32 actually mounted, thereby giving surprise to the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first origin position to the first rendering position below the first origin position. Occasionally, the mechanism part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the moving body M106 and the downward movement is restricted, thereby stopping the moving body M106. is displayed in imitation of the first non-mounting movable body M100 on which is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (A) and (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and displays the first effect display position. When stop-displaying at the performance display position, a reaction motion display (rebound display) of a specific amount of movement is performed.

More specifically, the first non-mounting movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the rendering section M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first rendering position, the mechanism section M100B is moved to the moving body M106. Since the mechanism portion M100B comes into contact with the upper portion of the , the downward movement is regulated, the mechanism portion M100B generates a recoil action due to the vibration before the effect portion M100A.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B1), when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, after performing the reaction movement display of the mechanism part M100B , as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B2), the recoil motion display of the effect section M100A is performed. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 simulating the first non-mounting movable body M100 different from the mounting movable body 32 is made more realistic (for example, the display simulating the mounting movable body 32 is different modes).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (C′) and (D′), the mounted movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the effect section 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and moves to the effect position. At this time, the mechanical portion 32B abuts on the upper portions of the left and right moving bodies 206 to restrict downward movement, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement.

Next, the operation mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the final effect will be described.

14-28 to 14-30, the production control CPU 120 performs a movable body production in which the mounting movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the production position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the determined production. After execution and notification of the determination of the big hit, it is possible to execute a pseudo movable body display in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-37(A), the effect control CPU 120 starts the determined effect at the timing ta0, and then the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B within the operation valid period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the rendering position during a period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) between timings ta1 and ta2, and then performs a recoil motion during a period between timings ta2 and ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

After that, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the performance position to the origin position, and the determination of the big hit is notified. Here, a period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) between timings ta4 and ta5 during which the mounting movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is a period between timings ta1 and ta2 during which the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Longer than TL1 (eg, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, in the performance using the mounting movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounting movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to the detection of the player's operation, the game is played by dropping the mounting movable body 32 quickly by its own weight. While impact can be given to a person, damage to the mounted movable body 32 due to the impact can be suppressed by moving the mounted movable body 32 slowly from the performance position to the origin position.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position at timing ta6 after a predetermined time has passed since the big hit confirmation notification, and the period TL2 of timing ta6 to ta7 (for example After moving and displaying from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in about 100 ms), a recoil action display is performed in a period of timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is the period ta9 to ta10, in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to the first position. It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, approximately 100 ms) between timings ta6 and ta7 for moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is the same as the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display. Slower than the speed when moving and displaying to the position.

Thus, in the moving display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100, the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is more likely than the moving display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. The first pseudo-movable object display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner by speeding it up in the same manner as the mounted movable object 32. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-37(B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the amount of movement L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the rendering position shows that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounting movable body 32 per unit time TL2. That is, the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement of the mounting movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can provide an impact effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, so that the player can be surprised.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-37(C), the amount of movement of the first recoil motion display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil motion display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves and displays from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of recoil motion display times (eg, 6 times) of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the number of recoil motion display times (eg, 4 times) of the mounted movable body 32 . By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves to the first performance position, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the first non-mounted movable body The movement display distance L2 from the first origin position of M100 to the first effect display position is the same, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is It is shorter than the period TL10 for moving the first non-mounting movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position (TL2<TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from one origin position to the first effect position. That is, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than the movement display of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position. is also fast. In this way, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 can provide an impact effect that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable object M100, so that the player can be surprised.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-38(C), the movement amount of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display performed when the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and the movement amount L11 of the first non-mounting movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first It is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil action display performed when moving and displaying to the performance position. Further, the number of recoil motion display times (eg, 6 times) of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the number of recoil motion display times (eg, 4 times) of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can simulate the effects of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. In addition, by displaying the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounting movable body 32 moves to the performance position in an exaggerated manner, the game can be played. It is possible to provide a production that leaves an impression on people.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined amount of movement in the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific amount of movement in the recoil motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is Although the comparison was made between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, it is also possible to compare the second and subsequent recoil actions with the recoil action display, or the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the recoil action. It may be a comparison with a displayed total or an average moving amount.

In addition, the recoil action is an action of jumping upward due to the recoil when the movable body stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a predetermined portion of the movable body due to the recoil. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39(A), when the mounting movable body 32 is moved from the rendering position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounting movable body M100 is moved from the first rendering position to the first origin position, In this case, since the driving sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, the effect control CPU 120 changes the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 from timing tb1 when the movement is started. The first period up to tb2 increases, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 decreases. That is, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until the first period elapses after starting to move, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in the second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are moved and displayed is, as shown in FIG. Since the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating the movement display are not necessary, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is performed by the first non-mounted movable body M100. or the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be performed more smoothly.

Next, movement display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-40.

As shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A) to (C), when creating a moving image in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first pseudo A first frame that is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame that is an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , is required.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A′) to (B′), when creating a moving image in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position , at least a first frame which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a first frame for displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is the input image, is required.

14-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and the first identification of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 The movement display distance L3 from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L3, and the movement display distance L2 is longer than the movement display distance L3. While the time required to move and display to the display position is about 100 ms, it takes about 100 ms to move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. Since the difference is 800 ms, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first moving display position from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200. 1 Faster than moving display to a specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. Although it is conceivable to display in the order of the second frame shown in 40(C), the frame rate will be low and the movement will be jerky and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 14-40(B) is inserted as an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. to increase the frame rate of the moving image, and move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame at the first initial display position, By performing in order of the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position, natural and smooth moving display can be performed.

In this way, even when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed at high speed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without degrading the visibility.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. Although it is conceivable to display the frames in the order of the second frame shown in FIG. 14-40(B'), the frame rate will be low and the movement will be jerky and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position. As an input image, a plurality of interpolated frames (not shown) are inserted to increase the frame rate of the moving image to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the first identification of the second pseudo-moving object display Z200. Moving display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position is performed for each display frame in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position. The pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be moved and displayed at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 without lowering the visibility.

Further, for example, in the advance notice effect B, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. Pattern PBY- in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position when PBY-4, which is displayed to move, is executed. 1, when PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big win state (big hit expectation) is different, so that the ratio of being controlled to the big win gaming state is different. The player can be made to recognize the pseudo movable body display Z200 by the difference in speed of the moving display.

In addition, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and a pattern PBY-4 in which the second initial display position is moved to the second effect display position are displayed. is executed, patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. Since the ratio of control to the big win state (big win expectation) is higher than when is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be noticed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the image display device 5 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stop-displays it at the first effect display position, Although the mode of displaying the reaction motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined amount of movement has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and image display as shown in FIGS. When the device 5 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stops and displays it at the second effect display position, a reaction movement display ( bounce display) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 (A) to (B), the image display device 5 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position. When stop-displaying at the second intermediate effect display position, or as shown in FIGS. When moving from to the second specific effect display position and stop-displaying at the second specific effect display position, a reaction motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Further, in the advance notice effect B, the reaction action display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position is the advance notice. It is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than that of the reaction movement display performed when the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the effect A. By doing so, since the advance notice effect B has a larger amount of movement than the notice effect A, it is possible to move and display in a more realistic manner.

In addition, after the pattern PBY-3 of the advance notice effect B or the big hit notification of the final effect, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. However, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the recoil motion display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in the pattern PBY-4 of the advance notice effect B. . By doing so, the recoil movement display becomes larger when the object is moved downward than when the object is displayed upward, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect position and the mounting movable body 32 moves to the origin position The direction of moving from to the rendering position is a common downward direction, and the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2. big.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounting movable body 32, thereby giving surprise to the player.
In addition, since it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to realize with the mounted movable body 32, or to move and display at a plurality of speeds, it is possible to diversify the effects.

In addition, in the characterizing part 241SG, an example is shown in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the speed of movement of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a comparison of the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the speed of the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may be a comparison of speed with movement. In other words, as long as the movement display of the pseudo-movable object display and the speed of the movement of the movable object are compared, the type of the pseudo-movable object display and the movable object to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display simulating the first non-mounted movable body M100 that performs a reaction movement of a predetermined movement amount when moving from the first origin position to the first effect position. The control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to vertically move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and is stop-displayed at the first effect display position, it is moved by a predetermined amount. Recoil movement display (rebound display) is performed, and movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. is larger than the moving amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 makes it possible to simulate the same effect as the first non-installable movable object M100 without installing the first non-installable movable object M100. By displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves to the first performance position, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is shown in which the reaction movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a comparison of the movement amount of the reaction movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may be a comparison between the recoil motion display of the display Z200 and the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32 . In other words, if it is a comparison of the amount of movement between the recoil motion display of the pseudo-movable body display and the recoil motion of the movable body, the types of the pseudo-movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

Further, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. When the development performance A is not executed and the development performance B is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) is higher.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the development effect A, which is the movable object effect, and the development effect B, which is the pseudo-movable object display effect, are executed.
Incidentally, when the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect B is executed without the development effect A being executed. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state at a rate of 100% when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed.

In addition, advance notice effect A that foretells the possibility (expectation) of the variable display result becoming a big hit, development effect B that informs that it will develop into a strong super reach effect, and development effect B suggest the possibility of being executed. and a development suggestion effect to be executed, and in the advance notice effect A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display After moving from the position to the first specific initial display position, it is hidden, and in the development effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position, from the first specific effect display position The display is hidden without moving to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position before execution of the development effect B is hidden. When doing so, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the advance notice effect A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same manner as the movable body as a structure, so whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the development suggestive effect, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the same way as the movable body, and the character image Z310 is displayed from the first specific effect display position. Since it is not displayed without being returned to the first specific initial display position, the player's attention can be drawn to the suggestion of execution of the development effect B.例文帳に追加

In addition, it is possible to execute a decisive performance for informing whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, and a development performance B for informing that the deterministic performance will be executed after developing into a strong super ready-to-win performance, and the development performance. In B, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed, after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display is performed. The ready-to-win title image Z51, which is hidden without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position and is not displayed and suggests the execution of the development effect B, is displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed in the final effect, after the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, After moving and displaying from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, it is hidden.
According to this feature, prior to execution of the determination effect, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 gives priority to the display of the suggestive image rather than the moving display of the movable object as a structure. Since it is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the final effect, while in the final effect, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is the same as the movable body. Since the moving display is performed as shown in FIG.
In addition, in the characterizing section 241SG, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner in the development effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner in the fixed effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo movable object display may be moved between the specific effect and the special effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame at the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position in that order, and a specific image ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which an image Z71A showing a plurality of broken glass pieces due to cracked glass scatters.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without lowering the visibility, and by emphasizing the moving display with the specific image, the moving display gives a favorable impression to the player. can be attached.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame at the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, and the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. A pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the advance notice effect B faster than the movement display from the position to the first specific effect display position; When PBY-4 is executed to move and display from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second effect display position. The ratio of control to the big win state (big win expectation) differs between when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 which are moved and displayed to the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is different. A player can be made to recognize the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 by the difference in speed of movement display.
Note that, in the advance notice effect B, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and a pattern PBY-3 moving from the second initial display position to the second effect display position are displayed. and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, a big hit is achieved. The ratio of control to the state (big hit expectation) is different when the pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in the announcement effect B, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit state is 100%, and the pattern PBY- 1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state is 0%, or when the pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the advance notice effect B, control is made to the big win state. 100%, and when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state is 0%.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are display images having not only the effect display portions Z100A and Z200A but also the mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B, etc., so that the movable body operated by the driving mechanism can be displayed. While the body can be expressed more realistically to enable the realization of a movable body display effect similar to the movable body effect, regarding the movement display, not only is the movement displayed in the same manner as the movement of the movable body, but also the movable body is displayed. However, by making it possible to move the display in a manner that is difficult to realize due to reasons such as the complexity of the mechanism and the increase in cost, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, high-speed movement, deformation display, and return display from the performance display position to the initial display position are erased (not displayed) as a mode of movement display that is difficult to realize with a movable body. However, by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo-moving object display and unrealistically displaying the moving display, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In particular, it is possible to hide or display the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved and displayed to the effect display position at a desired timing. When using this function, it is possible to avoid visibility deterioration due to other effects images being hidden, etc., and it is possible to immediately start the next effect, increasing the degree of freedom in the effect design. Play.

In addition, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is greater than that of the first non-mounted movable body M100. is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is displayed by the first pseudo movable body display Z100. can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounting movable body M100 without mounting the , and exaggerate the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves to the first performance position. By displaying in such a mode, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, since the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is installed. Since the moving speed is faster and the moving distance is longer than that of the movable body 32, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the pseudo movable body display includes effect display portions Z100A and Z200A and mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, since the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be made more realistic. can be moved and displayed in various modes.

In addition, the movement period of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the rendering position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display. Since the period does not include the first period and the second period, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 to the first effect position, the effect control CPU 120 performs light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same cycle. , the player can be made to pay attention to the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

In addition, the effect control CPU120 does not light-emitting the light-emitting display section Z108A when the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is being moved and displayed, so that the incomplete first pseudo-moving body display Z100 being moved and displayed can be seen. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 to the first effect position, the effect control CPU 120 performs light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same cycle. , the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. The pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved downward from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect in advance notice effect B. Since one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions by being different from the rightward movement display to the performance display position, the player can enjoy an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body. can be provided to

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then moves and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a different direction, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIG. 14-41. 14-41, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing Modification 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, as described with reference to FIGS. 14-25, in the advance notice effect A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, A mode is illustrated in which the mounting movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position as the development performance A after the movement display is performed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-41(D), the movable range of the mounting movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 partly overlap, that is, the mounting has moved to the effect position. When the movable body 32 and the second simulated movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 controls the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and the second simulated effect display Z200. When the moving display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is performed during a common period, the mounting movable body 32 overlaps the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. becomes difficult to visually recognize, it becomes easy to understand that the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is not a structure but a display object, and the attraction of the presentation is reduced.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 14-41(A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After being displayed (see FIG. 14-41(B)), by erasing without moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 14-41(C)), FIG. As shown in -41(D), as the development effect A, the mounting movable body 32 that has moved from the origin position to the effect position may be prevented from overlapping the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, Modification 2 of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-42. 14-42, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a modified example 2 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first effect display position are common. (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. A direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as the second modification moves between the first display position and a second display position above the first display position. , are in a common direction (for example, the vertical direction), the movement display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo movable body display Z402 is the movement display from the first position to the second display position of the mounted movable body 401. It should be faster than the movement to the position.

Also, the direction (downward) in which the mounting movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position and the direction (upward) in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. and may be in different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the movement of the mounting movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by executing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the simulated movable body display Z402 in a common period as in the present modified example 2, the mounted movable body 401 and the simulated An effect using the movable body display Z402 may be made executable.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-42, the mounting movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure on which the character “go” is displayed. 1 position and a second position lower than the first position. and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 as Modification 2 is capable of displaying the character "body", and the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Illustrations and descriptions of the detailed drive mechanisms of the mounting movable body 401 and the mounting movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, the production control CPU 120 executes the production using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the previous notice productions A and B and the development productions A and B described above. As shown in 14-42(A), in a state where the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are waiting at the first position, a pseudo movable body display is displayed as shown in FIG. 14-42(B). After Z402 is displayed at the first display position, as shown in FIG. 14-42(C), the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved from the first display position to the second display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42(D), the mounting movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounting movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z402 so as not to overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the simulated movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is simulated. In the closest proximity to the movable object display Z402, a quasi-union state is created in which the characters "union" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42(F), the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward while maintaining the pseudo-merged state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo-movable body display Z402, and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 is displayed. By moving and displaying upward and moving the mounting movable bodies 501L and 501R to the second predetermined position, it is notified that the effect will develop due to the success of the simulated combination.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-42(G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position or the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is set to the first display position. After the image is moved and displayed in different first specific display positions (for example, left and right positions), the image is framed out to the left and right of the screen or erased by fading out.

On the other hand, if it is decided to notify that the pseudo-union is not successful and the effect is not developed, etc., as shown in FIG. By stopping the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 while decelerating it while displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, and displaying the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, It notifies that the simulated combination is not successful and the performance is not developed. In this way, in the pseudo-movable object display Z402, it is possible to easily realize an effect that is difficult to achieve with a movable object as a structure.

(Modification 3)
Next, Modification 3 of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIG. 14-43. 14-43, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a modified example 3 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characterizing section 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. , The present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to those capable of reciprocating display in one direction such as the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. A) As shown in (B), after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction of moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-43(C), in the first effect display position, only the effect display part Z200A is vertically rotated around the rotation axis facing the horizontal direction. It is preferable to be able to perform various forms of movement display, such as different rotational movement display and movement display in a form of movement in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

Although the characteristic portion 241SG in the embodiment of the invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and modifications and additions may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention. is also included in this invention.

(description of variations and applications)
In the characteristic portion 241SG, the form in which the mounting movable body 32 is applied as the movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of mounting movable bodies other than the mounting movable body 32 are illustrated. A movable body may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁In addition, not only the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but also the frame-side movable body provided in the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door capable of opening and closing the game machine frame 3 may be used. A pseudo-movable body display simulating a side movable body may be movable and displayed. Also, as the board-side movable body, it is possible to display a pseudo-movable body display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, as the movable bodies that were supposed to be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 but were not mounted, a form was exemplified in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 were applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable bodies other than the first non-mounting movable body M100 and the second non-mounting movable body M200 were scheduled to be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but are not mounted. good too.

Further, in the characterizing section 241SG, when erasing the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving body display Z200, the embodiment is exemplified in a mode in which the display is gradually faded out. It is not limited to this, and an effect image may be displayed to emphasize the deletion, or deletion may be performed by a method other than these.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounting movable body 32 to the effect position is the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. , and when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, a common effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter is displayed, and a common effect image Z71 is displayed. Although the mode of outputting sound effects has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. An effect image that is longer than the movement display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and has different modes when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. A different sound effect may be output along with the display. By doing so, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be used to highlight the movement of the mounting movable body 32 .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, during the super reach variable display period, the movement of the mounting movable body 32 can be executed up to two times, the development effect A and the fixed effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is , the advance notice effect B and the fixed effect can be executed a maximum of two times, and the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be executed up to four times, the notice effect A, the notice effect B, the development suggestive effect, and the development effect B. Although a certain form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of execution times of movement of the movable body and display of the pseudo-movable body may be a number other than the number of times described above.

Further, when the movable body can be moved a first number of times in one variable display period, the pseudo movable body display can be moved a second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times, in one variable display period. preferable. By doing so, instead of increasing the chances of executing the movable body production too much and lowering the expectation of the big win, by increasing the opportunities of executing the pseudo-moving body display, the production is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

In addition to the above effects, for example, when the symbol is promoted in a re-lottery after the big hit is announced, or during the big hit, the pseudo movable body display may be displayed in a moving manner. The movable object display may be a pseudo movable object display different from the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200.

Further, the notice performance A is applied as a special suggestive performance suggesting that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state, and the advanced performance B is applied as a notification performance for notifying contents advantageous to the player, so that the notification performance is executed. A development suggesting performance is applied as a prescribed performance to suggest, a decision performance is applied as a special performance for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state, and the special performance is suggested to be executed before the special performance is executed. Although the form in which the notice effect B is applied as the specific effect has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects other than the above can be applied. Moreover, although these various effects can be executed in one variable display period of super reach, the effects may be executed over a plurality of variable display periods.

In addition, the content that is advantageous to the player is, in the pachinko machine 1, pseudo-runs, big wins, small wins, reach, holding runs, chance-up effects, pre-reading notice effects, time-saving attachment loss, ceiling time-saving control, etc., which will be described later. , variable display results, controls and effects may be included. In the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winning, assist time (AT) winning, replay time (RT) winning, bonus winning, and the like may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 are turned on. By lowering the luminance or turning off the light, the display of the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 are made conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 are displayed. is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on so that the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be played. can distract a person.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, while the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 can be adjusted by the player's operation, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be adjusted. It is preferable that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting display section Z108A and the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 be disabled by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo movable body display from being spoiled or becoming unnoticeable.

Further, in the characterizing portion 241SG, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden in the development suggestive effect, the display area including the first specific effect display position Although the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image, the present invention is not limited to this. Images other than character images (for example, images simulating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used, if any.

In addition, in the characterizing section 241SG, in the development effect B, the ready-to-win title image Z51 is displayed in the mode at the start of display as a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the final effect, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as long as the suggestive image suggests the execution of the determined effect, an image other than the reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in the strong super reach effect or determined effect) may be used. .

Further, in the characterizing section 241SG, the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 are displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of pseudo movable object displays may be moved and displayed during a common period. In this case, for example, the movement displayable range of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 and the movement displayable range of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is displayed in the overlap region. and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, one of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed in a display layer closer to the viewer than the other. Since it is possible to make the player aware of the front-rear positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic performance.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, consideration is given to the fact that the mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, in the display area of the image display device 5, a mounting movable body, a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion where the display of the mechanism display part of the pseudo movable body display starts. The part where the display of the mechanism display part of the pseudo movable body display is started by moving the body may be made difficult to see.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 241SG, the display result of the variable display includes "time saving", but the CPU 103 can set predetermined conditions (for example, the flag stored in the RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6, Clear processing for clearing the counter and buffer, control to a big win game state, or setting the display result to a time-saving loss) is performed a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times, etc.) ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute the ceiling time-saving control to control to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot game state. In addition, the internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is established, and the number of times of time saving in the time saving state by the ceiling time saving control (for example, 900 times) is the number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state (for example, 100 times). can be different.

When the ceiling time saving control as described above is executed and the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specified number of times without the predetermined condition being satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second A movement display of a pseudo-moving body display such as the pseudo-moving body display Z200 may be executable. In this way, it may be possible to execute the movement display of the pseudo movable body display in each notification such as the notification of the big hit, the notification of the loss with the time saving, the notification of the ceiling time saving control, etc. In each notification, the type of the pseudo movable body display and the movement display Modes and the like may be changed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the form in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed as a notification of a big hit has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a small hit or time saving. In the case of losing or when the above-described ceiling time saving control is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 informs of small hits and time saving loss and ceiling time saving control On the other hand, when the result of the variable display indicates a big win, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 may be used to announce the big win.

In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or a time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a big hit, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify. You may make it the aspect differ. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or a time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a big hit, the pseudo-moving body display is used to notify. It can be different.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, as a pachinko game machine, a form is exemplified in which a so-called pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a so-called 1 type 2 type game machine that can be controlled to a big win game state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in the time saving state after the end of the big win game, and the game performance can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 or the like is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls given according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is increased. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine in which the amount is subtracted and stored. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the game machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, and capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the satisfaction of the starting condition;
with
The production executing means is
executing the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect;
It is possible to execute a special effect that notifies that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
The display means is
In the specific effect and the special effect, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner,
When moving and displaying the pseudo-movable object display in the specific effect, it is possible to hide the pseudo-movable object display after moving and displaying the pseudo-movable object display from the first display position to the second display position,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode in which the ratio of control to the advantageous state is different from the first special mode,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
The ratio of displaying the specific display of the special mode when the specific light emitting effect is executed is higher than the ratio of displaying the specific display of the first special mode when the specific light emitting effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images